Past Paper Solutions [Student Responses]
COMPUTER SCIENCE [6918]

Data Representation

Communication

Hardware

Logic Gates

Processor Fundamental

Assembly Language

Monitoring & Control System

System Software

Security Privacy & Data Integrity

Ethics & Ownership

Database

Logic Gates

Hardware & Virtual  Machine

Floating Point

File Organization

Communication & Internet

PHYSICS [9702]
BIOLOGY [9700]

1 The diagram shows a mitochondrion drawn from an electron micrograph.
X
Y
The actual length of the mitochondrion, using the line X–Y, is 3000 nm.
What is the magnification of the drawing of the mitochondrion?
A 100 B 1000 C 10 000 D 100 000


2 A specimen of plant tissue is observed twice with a microscope, firstly using red light with a
wavelength of 650 nm and then using green light with a wavelength of 510 nm.
What happens to the magnification and resolution when using green light compared to red light?
magnification resolution
A decreases decreases
B increases increases
C remains the same decreases
D remains the same increases


3 The electron micrograph shows a structure found in the cytoplasm of an animal cell.
What is this cell structure?
A centriole
B lysosome
C ribosome
D vesicle

 

4 Which cell structures contain nucleic acid?
1 Golgi body
2 lysosome
3 mitochondria
4 ribosomes
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 2 and 4 C 1 and 4 only D 3 and 4


5 Which statements about mitochondria, chloroplasts or prokaryotes are correct?
1 Mitochondria and chloroplasts have a fully permeable inner membrane and a
partially permeable outer membrane.
2 Prokaryotes and chloroplasts have 70S ribosomes that are the sites for translation
and polypeptide synthesis.
3 Prokaryotes and mitochondria have an outer membrane and an inner, folded
membrane where ATP synthesis occurs.
4 Prokaryotes and mitochondria have circular DNA where genes coding for
information are located.
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 2 and 4 C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 4 only


6 The very large (1000 nm) Pandora viruses found in Chile and Australia are considered to be
viruses because they cannot replicate their own genome and cannot make proteins.
They also share essential structural features with other viruses.
What are the essential structural features of viruses?
1 non-cellular
2 protein coat
3 both DNA and RNA
4 either DNA or RNA
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 2 and 4 C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 4 only

 

7 A sample of food was heated with Benedict’s solution which changed colour to green.
A second sample of the same food was boiled with dilute hydrochloric acid and neutralised using
sodium hydrogencarbonate. It was then heated with Benedict’s solution which changed colour to
red.
What did these results show?
glucose present
reducing
sugar present
non-reducing
sugar present
A
C B
D


8 Which pair of molecules only includes macromolecules that can be found in animal cells?
A amylase and amylopectin
B collagen and glycogen
C deoxyribose and starch
D sucrose and haemoglobin

 

9 Homogalacturonan is a polysaccharide found in plant cell walls.
The diagram shows a molecule of the monomer used to form homogalacturonan.
CO2H
HO
H
H
OH
O
H OH
OH H
A student studied the structure of this monomer and compared it with the structure of the
monomer used to form cellulose.
Which carbon atoms in the monomer in the diagram have hydroxyl groups arranged in different
positions to those found in the cellulose monomer?
A carbon one and carbon four
B carbon one only
C carbon three and carbon four
D carbon three only


10 Which statement is correct for triglycerides and phospholipids?
A A phosphate group is joined to a glycerol molecule.
B Hydrocarbon chains may be saturated or unsaturated.
C They are polar molecules.
D They contain three ester bonds.


11 Which description of collagen is correct?
A A collagen molecule consists of three polypeptide chains, each in the shape of a helix. The
three chains are wound together into a triple helix called a fibre.
B A collagen molecule consists of three polypeptide chains, each of which is an -helix. The
three chains are wound tightly together into a triple helix. Many of these triple helices bind
together as a fibre.
C A collagen molecule consists of three polypeptide chains wound tightly into a triple helix
called a fibre.
D A collagen molecule consists of three polypeptide chains in which every third amino acid is
glycine. The three polypeptides are wound tightly together into a triple helix. Many of these
helices form a fibre.

 

12 In a healthy human, the mean value for the number of haemoglobin molecules in one red blood
cell is 260 million.
How many -globin chains does one red blood cell contain in a healthy human?
A 1.3  108 B 2.6  108 C 5.2  108 D 1.04  109


13 Which statements about a peptide bond are correct?
1 It joins two monomers which are always identical to each other.
2 It contains four different atoms.
3 It can be broken by the addition of water at room temperature.
4 It is important in the primary structure of proteins.
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 3 only C 2, 3 and 4 D 2 and 4 only


14 Which graph correctly shows the activation energy of a reaction when an enzyme is added?

 

15 The enzyme lactase is found in the membranes of epithelial cells lining the small intestine.
The enzyme is formed by a single polypeptide that folds to give three regions.
 an active site with the free amino group outside the cell
 a short section inside the membrane
 a short section inside the cell
What type of amino acid would be found in each of the three regions?
outside the cell inside the
membrane
inside the
cell
A hydrophilic hydrophobic hydrophilic
B hydrophilic hydrophobic hydrophobic
C hydrophobic hydrophilic hydrophobic
D hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophilic


16 A student wrote three statements about cell signalling.
1 A signal chemical always has the same shape as a protein receptor on a target cell.
2 An increase in temperature may decrease the effect of cell to cell signalling.
3 A mutation may decrease production of active protein receptors for the cell surface
membrane.
Which statements are correct?
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 3 only C 1 only D 2 and 3 only


17 At which stages of mitosis are chromosomes composed of two chromatids that are held together
by a centromere?
A anaphase and telophase
B anaphase and prophase
C metaphase and prophase
D metaphase and telophase

 

18 The jellyfish, Turritopsis dohrnii, is described as being immortal. If T. dohrnii is not eaten by
predators or diseased, it seems to be able to live forever. There is no way to determine the
biological age of a T. dohrnii individual.
Which feature of the cells in T. dohrnii could explain these observations?
A very long G phases in the cell cycle
B a very short S phase in the cell cycle
C an ability to restore telomeres to their original length
D fewer chromosomes than other eukaryotic organisms


19 Some chemicals, used to stop tumour growth, work by preventing the DNA double helix from
uncoiling and separating.
During which stage of the cell cycle would they act?
A anaphase
B interphase
C metaphase
D prophase


20 Four nucleotides, A, B, C and D, each consist of three phosphate groups, a nitrogenous base
and a pentose sugar. Characteristics of the base and sugar components before they are joined to
form each nucleotide are shown in the table.
Which nucleotide could pair with an adenine base during DNA replication?
ring structure of
nitrogenous base
ratio of carbon to
oxygen atoms in
pentose sugar
A double 1 : 1
B double 5 : 4
C single 1 : 1
D single 5 : 4

 

21 The statements describe the process of translation.
1 A peptide bond forms between adjacent amino acids.
2 Hydrogen bonds form between the anticodon and the codon.
3 mRNA binds to the ribosome.
4 tRNA enters the ribosome carrying a specific amino acid.
In which order does this process take place?
A 3  2  1  4
B 3  4  2  1
C 4  2  1  3
D 4  2  3  1


22 The sequence of amino acids in a section of a polypeptide is:
… histidine–proline–aspartic acid–leucine…
amino acid possible DNA triplet codes
aspartic acid CTA CTG
histidine GTA GTG
leucine GAT GAC
proline GGA GGG
What is a correct sequence of mRNA codons for this polypeptide section?
A …CAC CCC GAA CUG…
B …CAU CCU GAC CUA…
C …GTA CCA CTG GAT…
D …GUA GGA CUG GAU…


23 What contributes to the upward movement of water in a xylem vessel of a plant?
1 cohesion of water molecules by hydrogen bonding
2 adhesion of water molecules to the cellulose walls of xylem vessels by hydrogen
bonding
3 removal of water from xylem vessels in a leaf reduces the hydrostatic pressure in
the xylem
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only

 

24 The diameter of a tree trunk usually decreases slightly during the day.
Which changes in environmental factors during the day could cause the diameter to decrease
even more?

25 The diagram shows a transverse section of a stem.
Which area is the phloem?

 

26 The diagram shows a xerophytic leaf in different conditions, P and Q.

Which statements describe the difference between the cells in layer Y in conditions P and Q?
1 more negative water potential in P than Q
2 more cells plasmolysed in P
3 cells less turgid in Q
4 water potential becomes zero in Q
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4

 

27 Different substances, such as sucrose and amino acids, can move in different directions in the
phloem sieve tube elements.
Which statement explains this?
A Active transport occurs in some phloem sieve tube elements and mass flow occurs in other
sieve tube elements.
B Both active transport and mass flow occur in each individual phloem sieve tube element.
C Mass flow occurs in both directions at the same time in each individual phloem sieve tube
element.
D Mass flow occurs in different directions in different phloem sieve tube elements at the same time.

 

28 The statements list some of the events in a cardiac cycle. The statements are not in the correct
order.
Which statement describes the fourth of these events to occur in the cardiac cycle?
1 The impulse travels through Purkyne tissue.
2 A wave of excitation sweeps across the atria.
3 The atrioventricular node delays the impulse for a fraction of a second.
4 The sinoatrial node contracts.
5 The wave of excitation sweeps upwards from the base of the ventricles.
6 The ventricles contract.
7 The atria contract.
A 1 B 3 C 4 D 7


29 Which row correctly identifies components of both lymph and tissue fluid?
antibodies red
blood cells
sodium
ions
white
blood cells
A     key
B     = component present
C      = component not present
D    


30 Which row is correct for the mean blood pressure in different parts of the human circulatory
system?
mean blood pressure
right
atrium
artery in
arm
vein in
arm
capillary
in arm key
A + ++++ ++ +++ ++++ highest mean blood pressure
B ++ ++++ +++ + +++
C +++ ++ ++++ + ++
D ++++ +++ + ++ + lowest mean blood pressure

 

31 Which mechanism accounts for the way most of the carbon dioxide is transported in blood?
A Carbon dioxide dissolves in plasma and is carried in solution.
B Carbon dioxide is converted to carbaminohaemoglobin inside red blood cells.
C Carbon dioxide is converted to carboxyhaemoglobin inside red blood cells.
D Carbon dioxide is converted to hydrogencarbonate ions inside red blood cells.


32 The graph shows the dissociation curves for haemoglobin at two different partial pressures of
carbon dioxide.
At which position on the graph, A, B, C, or D, is the concentration of haemoglobinic acid lowest in
red blood cells?

 

33 The table shows the partial pressure of carbon dioxide and oxygen in two blood vessels.
partial pressure of
gas in pulmonary
artery / kPa
partial pressure of
gas in pulmonary
vein / kPa
carbon dioxide 6 5
oxygen 5 15
What explains the difference in the partial pressures of oxygen in the pulmonary artery and
pulmonary vein?
A Oxygen diffuses from the alveoli into the blood in the capillaries.
B Carbon dioxide diffuses into the alveoli from the blood in the capillaries.
C Oxygen diffuses from the body cells into the blood in the capillaries.
D Carbon dioxide diffuses into the body cells from the blood in the capillaries.

 

34 Which graph shows the effect of carbon monoxide on the percentage saturation of haemoglobin
with oxygen?

 

35 Which row shows the correct methods of transmission of the named pathogens?
method of transmission
airborne droplets insect vector water
A Morbillivirus Mycobacterium Vibrio
B Mycobacterium Plasmodium Vibrio
C Plasmodium Vibrio Morbillivirus
D Vibrio Plasmodium Mycobacterium


36 Which disease is caused by a eukaryote?
A cholera
B malaria
C measles
D smallpox

 

37 What is the initial mechanism by which bacteria become resistant to antibiotics?
A genetic mutation
B overuse of antibiotics
C natural selection
D patients not finishing a course of antibiotics


38 What are functions of T-lymphocytes?
1 production of cytokines
2 production of toxins
3 recognition of an antigen bound to an antigen-presenting cell
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 3 only


39 What is correct about the role of memory cells in long-term immunity?
1 They divide to form plasma cells and memory cells when the pathogen enters the
body a second time.
2 They produce a fast response so that the person infected with the pathogen does
not become ill again.
3 They produce more antibodies than were produced during the primary immune
response.
4 They remain in the blood and lymphatic system after the pathogen has been
destroyed.
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 2 and 4 C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 4 only

 

40 Which events result in a person developing actively acquired immunity?
1 becoming infected by TB bacteria
2 drinking breast milk
3 receiving an injection of antigens
4 receiving an injection of antibodies
A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 3 and 4 C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 4

 

Ans:

Question Answer Marks
1 C 
2 D 
3 A 
4 D 
5 D 
6 B 
7 C 
8 B 
9 A 

10 B 
11 D 
12 C 
13 D 
14 D 
15 A 
16 D
17 C 
18 C 
19 B 
20 D 
21 B
22 B 
23 A 
24 D 
25 B 
26 B 
27 D 
28 B 

29 B 
30 A 
31 D 
32 C 
33 A 
34 A 
35 B 
36 B 
37 A 
38 A 
39 B 
40 C 

1 Fig. 1.1 is a transmission electron micrograph of cells from duckweed, Spirodela oligorrhiza.

(a) Calculate the actual width of the cell labelled X.
Write down the formula you will use to make your calculation.
Show your working and give your answer in micrometres to one decimal place.

Ans: actual width = image width ÷ magnification ;
A A = I ÷ M M = I ÷ A I = A
× M or magnification triangle
working = width divided by 4275 ;
e.g.
16 000 ÷ 4275 17 000 ÷ 4275 18 000 ÷ 4275 19 000 ÷ 4275 ;
3.7 (
μm) 4.0 (
μm) 4.2 (
μm) 4.4 (μm) ;
R answer if given to more than 1 dp or whole number

 

(b) (i) Table 1.1 lists some biological molecules found in plant cells.
Complete Table 1.1 by choosing one letter from Fig. 1.1 that indicates a cell structure
where each biological molecule is found.
Table 1.1
biological molecule letter from Fig. 1.1
DNA
cellulose
phospholipid
histone proteins
(ii) State the name of a cell structure, visible in Fig. 1.1, where ATP is synthesised.

Ans

DNA –
A / B / C ;
cellulose –
E ;
phospholipid –
A / C ;
histone proteins

A / B ;

 

(iii) Name a cell structure that produces mRNA.

Ans: chloroplast / mitochondrion ;

(c) Describe the evidence from Fig. 1.1 that shows that the image is a transmission electron
micrograph.

any two from
1 (section at) high resolution ;
A suggestion of a correct value of resolution for a TEM
2 any named structure visible in Fig. 1.1 that can, only be seen in a TEM / not be seen in a photomicrograph ;
e.g. internal structure of chloroplasts / thylakoid(s) / grana
e.g. internal structure of mitochondria / cristae
3 high magnification / higher magnification (magnification > 1000 / higher than with light microscope) ;
in context of higher than light microscope
4 (very) thin ;
5 2D / no surface contours / no surface features / AW ; A not 3D

 

2 Fig. 2.1 shows three molecules of water

(a) Describe the hydrogen bonding that occurs between the water molecules shown in Fig. 2.1.

Ans: any three from
1 (diagram shows) hydrogen bond is a weak bond ;
2 each oxygen (atom) forms two hydrogen bonds / each hydrogen (atom) forms one hydrogen bond ;
3 (attraction) between oxygen (atom) of one water molecule and hydrogen (atom) of another (forms a hydrogen bond) ;
R cohesion / adhesion – if used for attraction
4 water is dipolar ;
5 detail ;
e.g. electrons not shared equally between oxygen and hydrogen
A oxygen is more electronegative (than hydrogen)
A ref. to (two) lone pair(s) (of electrons) on oxygen
A uneven distribution of, electrons / charge
e.g. oxygen has, small / slight, negative charge / δ–, and, hydrogen has, small / slight, positive charge / δ+
only needs to state ‘small’ once

 

(b) The human enzyme, salivary amylase, is composed of one polypeptide. Fig. 2.2 represents
the structure of a molecule of salivary amylase.

Ans: idea that (H-bonds) maintain / AW, (shape / structure, form of)
α-helices / β-pleated sheets ;
A allows formation of, α-helices / β-pleated sheets
R if bonds are between R groups

(i) Explain the role of hydrogen bonding in maintaining the secondary structure of proteins,
such as salivary amylase.

Ans: idea that (H-bonds) maintain / AW, (shape / structure, form of)
α-helices / β-pleated sheets ;
A allows formation of, α-helices / β-pleated sheets
R if bonds are between R groups

 

(ii) Explain the role of hydrogen bonding in maintaining the tertiary structure of proteins such
as salivary amylase.

Ans: any two from
1 idea that hydrogen bonds help to, stabilise / AW, further folding of, amylase / polypeptide / protein ;
2 between, R groups with amine and carboxyl groups ;
A between R groups with -NH and, -CO / -OH
3 idea that may be between amino acids far apart in primary structure ;
4 either helps to maintain / form / AW, globular shape / 3D shape / structure (of amylase / polypeptide / protein)
or
maintains / forms / AW, (specific) shape / structure, of, active site / binding site ; 

 

(c) Outline the importance of water as a solvent in plants.

Ans: any three from
1 dissolves / AW, ions / minerals / salts, and (named) polar molecules ;
A ‘assimilates’ as polar I substances / nutrients
2 transports, solute(s) / named solutes / dissolved substance, in, xylem / phloem / xylem and phloem ;
3 storage of, solutes / named solutes, in vacuoles ;
4 metabolic / chemical / cellular, reactions occur in water ;
5 dissolves, carbon dioxide / oxygen, with ref to, respiration / photosynthesis;

 

3 Visking tubing can be used to investigate the properties of cell membranes.
A student carried out an experiment to investigate osmosis using Visking tubing. An outline of the
investigation is shown in Fig. 3.1.

Six pieces of Visking tubing were filled with 10cm3 of different concentrations of sucrose
solution: 0.0, 0.4, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6 and 2.0moldm–3.
• The height of the meniscus of each solution in the Visking tubing was measured.
• The pieces of Visking tubing were put into test-tubes containing 15cm3 of 0.9moldm–3
sucrose solution.
• After 20 minutes, the pieces of Visking tubing were removed from the test-tubes and the
height of the meniscus in each was measured.
The results are shown in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
concentration of sucrose
solution inside Visking tubing
/moldm–3
difference in height of
meniscus after
20 minutes/mm
0.0 –12
0.4 –4
0.8 –2
1.2 +1
1.6 +6
2.0 +11

(a) The Visking tubing used by the student was not permeable to sucrose.
Explain the results shown in Table 3.1.

Ans: any three from
1 differences in height show that
concentrations of sucrose, 0, 0.4 and 0.8 (mol dm–3) or
⩽ / less than, 0.8 / 0.9, water moves out of Visking tubing ;
A one of 0, 0.4 or 0.8 R sucrose moving
2 concentrations of sucrose 1.2, 1.6, 2.0 (mol dm-3) or
⩾ / more than, 0.9 /1.2, water moves into Visking tubing ;
A one of 1.2, 1.6 or 2.0 R sucrose moving
3 ref. to net water movement ;
if water enters Visking tubing – A ora for water leaving
4 external solution has higher water potential (than contents of Visking tubing) ;
A high water potential to low water potential
5 water moves, down, water potential / Ψ, gradient ; 

 

(b) When red blood cells are placed in water they are destroyed by bursting.
The student also investigated how red blood cells are affected by immersion in solutions of
sodium chloride of different concentration. Blood samples of the same volume were added to
solutions of sodium chloride in separate test-tubes.
After 10 minutes, the student took 0.1cm3 of the blood samples from the test-tubes and
estimated the percentage of red blood cells that had burst in each blood sample.
Fig. 3.2 shows the student’s results.

Describe and explain the effects on red blood cells of immersion in different concentrations of
sodium chloride as shown in Fig. 3.2.

Ans: mark whole question to a max of four marks
descriptions
1 at concentrations, less than / ⩽, 0.04 mol dm–3 all cells, burst / AW ;
2 at concentrations between 0.04 and 0.14 mol dm–3 decreasing percentage of cells burst / AW ; A use of percentages
3 at concentrations, greater than / ⩾, 0.14 mol dm–3 no cells, burst / AW ;
explanations to max 3
4 in low concentrations / ⩽ 0.04, of sodium chloride water moves into cells down water potential gradient / from high
Ψ to
low
Ψ ;
5 cells increase in, volume / size / internal pressure ;
6 either
cell membranes are not strong enough to withstand increase in volume / pressure
or
red blood cells burst because they have no cell wall ;
7 between 0.04 and 0.14 (mol dm–3) water potential gradient into cells, decreases / becomes less steep / AW ;
8 above 0.14 (mol dm–3) / in high concentrations, water potential inside cells is the same or higher than the sodium
chloride solution ;
9 at high concentration / ⩾ 0.14, water leaves cells / cells shrink / cells shrivel / cells show crenation ; 

 

4 (a) The induced-fit hypothesis and the lock-and-key hypothesis are used to describe the mode of
action of enzymes.
Explain the induced-fit hypothesis.

Ans: idea of shape needs to be in the answer for mp2 and mp4 I ‘substrate changes shape’
any three from
1 active site is not (fully) complementary to substrate ;
2 active site, changes shape / moulds around, to fit the substrate ;
A conformational change for shape change
3 enzyme-substrate complex / ESC, forms ;
4 active site returns to original shape on release of product ;
5 AVP ;
e.g. change of shape (to give complementary fit) lowers activation energy / puts strain on bonds / AW
ref. to binding site / catalytic site (of active site)

 

(b) Radish plants contain the enzyme peroxidase that catalyses the breakdown of hydrogen
peroxide.
Students investigated the effect of increasing the concentration of hydrogen peroxide on the
activity of peroxidase extracted from radish.
The results of their investigation are shown in Fig. 4.1.

(i) Explain the effect of increasing the concentration of hydrogen peroxide on the initial rate
of reaction as shown in Fig. 4.1

Ans: A peroxidase for enzyme
any three from
rate of reaction increases as substrate concentration increases to 0.33 – 0.35 mmol dm-3
1 (up to 0.33 to 0.35 mmol dm–3) some active sites are not occupied ;
2 more collisions between, enzyme / active site, and substrate molecules ;
A more collisions lead to increase in formation of enzyme-substrate complexes
rate of reaction remains constant above 0.33–0.35 mmol dm–3
3 all active sites, occupied / saturated ;
4 correct reference to limiting factor for slope ; A limits / limiting
e.g. at low substrate concentrations, substrate concentration limiting / enzyme concentration not limiting
5 correct reference to limiting factor for plateau ; A limits / limiting
e.g. at high substrate concentrations, enzyme concentration limiting / substrate concentration not limiting

 

(ii) The students determined the Km for radish peroxidase as 0.10mmoldm–3.
With reference to Fig. 4.1, describe how they determined the Km.

Ans: idea that determined Vmax / maximum rate / ref. to 5.6 (
μmol min–1) ;
A if Vmax shown on graph
K
m is the substrate concentration at half the Vmax ;

 

(c) A further investigation found that the Km for carbonic anhydrase is 12mmoldm–3.
Describe the role of carbonic anhydrase in the transport of carbon dioxide.

Ans: any three from
in respiring tissue
1 (carbonic anhydrase) catalyses the reaction between water and carbon dioxide in, red (blood) cells / erythrocytes ;
2 to form carbonic acid, which dissociates to form HCO3
– and H+ ;
A from equation
A use of word ion(s)
3 HCO3
–, moves / passes / diffuses (through membrane proteins from red blood cells) into plasma ;
4 (activity of enzyme) maintains (steep) concentration gradient for diffusion of carbon dioxide into red blood cells ;
5 idea that so helps to remove large quantities of carbon dioxide ;
in lungs
6 (carbonic anhydrase) converts HCO3
– back into carbon dioxide so can be, excreted / removed / exhaled ;
if described earlier
A catalyses reverse reaction so carbon dioxide can be, excreted / AW 

 

5 Much success was made in reducing the number of cases of malaria between 2000 and 2015.
(a) Explain how malaria is transmitted.

Ans: 1 vector is female Anopheles (mosquito) ;
2 mosquito / (female) Anopheles, takes blood from infected person ; I ‘bites’ alone
3 (vector / mosquito / Anopheles) inserts / AW, saliva / anticoagulant, with, pathogen / Plasmodium / parasite, into (blood
of) uninfected person ;
R if incorrect type of pathogen

 

(b) Diagnostic test strips for malaria contain monoclonal antibodies. The test strips detect
antigens produced by the pathogens that cause malaria.
Fig. 5.1 shows stages in the production of monoclonal antibodies. The information in three of
these stages is incomplete.
Complete Fig. 5.1.

Ans: B-lymphocytes / B-cells ;
fuse / combine / join / merge / AW ;
R hybridise / bind / bond
hybridoma ; 

 

(c) Fig. 5.2 shows two diagnostic test strips for malaria.

A sample of blood from a person suspected of having malaria is put into the well
labelled S.
• A buffer solution is put into the well labelled A.
• The buffer solution moves the blood towards the results window.
• A line at position C indicates that the test is working correctly.
• A line at position T indicates a positive result for malaria.
State three advantages of using test strips for malaria, such as those shown in Fig. 5.2.

Ans: any three from
1 results are accurate (rely on monoclonal antibodies) ;
2 results are obtained quickly / diagnosis is quick ;
3 low cost / cheap ;
4 does not need highly trained medical professional / easy to read / easy to use / AW ;
5 does not need specialised equipment ;
6 easily, transported / distributed (in bulk) ;
7 can ensure appropriate treatment is given immediately malaria is confirmed ;
8 reduces unnecessary use of antimalarial drugs (just in case) ;
9 (a small area for S so) only a small sample of blood needed ;
10 AVP ;
e.g. can identity different species of Plasmodium
I ref. to line C and working correctly

 

(d) The highest number of cases of malaria occur in sub-Saharan Africa and South-East Asia.
Discuss the factors that determine the global distribution of malaria.

Ans: ignore ref. to sickle cell anaemia
any five from
habitat of Anopheles mosquito
1 tropical / warm and humid / AW, climate / regions ;
A in context of global warming (increases life span of Anopheles)
2 in areas where, Anopheles (mosquito) / vector, occurs ;
3 Anopheles mosquitoes only live in humid conditions ;
4 warm temperatures for, development / growth, of, parasite / Plasmodium (in vector / mosquito) ;
5 warm temperature for, development / growth, of mosquito larvae ;
6 mosquitoes require bodies of, still / AW, water for breeding ;
A ponds, puddles, lakes, swamps
7 mosquitoes require places where there is sufficient rainfall ;
8 low altitude ;
resistance
9 insecticide / repellent, resistance of mosquitoes ;
10 drug resistance of parasite ;
prevention
11 in countries / areas, where, prevention / control measures, are not implemented by, governments / health authorities ;
12 further detail e.g. any example of a, prevention / control measure that is not used or not implemented fully ;
immunity
13 immunity to malaria in human population (limits distribution) ;
people
14 migration of infected people from areas (with high rates of malaria) ;
15 high rates of HIV infection ;

 

6 Lysosomes are cell structures that contain enzymes known as acid hydrolases.
Fig. 6.1 shows some processes that occur in animal cells

(a) Name the cell structures labelled A and E

A rough endoplasmic reticulum ;
E Golgi, body / apparatus / complex ;

 

(b) State the function of the structures labelled F.

Ans: transport from, (R)ER / ribosomes, to Golgi ; A from
A to E
A transport from Golgi to, cell surface membrane / phagosome
A separate, acid hydrolases / enzymes, from, rest of cell / AW 

(c) Name the process by which bacteria are taken into the cell at C.

Ans: phagocytosis / endocytosis ; 

 

(d) With reference to the processes occurring at B and at D in Fig. 6.1, outline the role of acid
hydrolases in lysosomes.

Ans: any three from
1 break down / digest / destroy, bacteria / pathogen(s) ;
2 break down / digest / destroy, (worn out / defective / AW), organelles / named organelle (in animal cell) ; A autophagy
3 catalyse / speed up, hydrolysis ;
4 any two named substrates ;
e.g. (any named) polysaccharides / proteins / (phospho)lipids / (named) nucleic acids
5 idea that recycle / reuse, biological molecules within cell ;
6 (macrophage / phagocyte) cut up to present antigen ; 

 

(e) Carrier proteins in the membranes of lysosomes maintain a lower pH than the surrounding
cytoplasm by moving hydrogen ions.
Suggest how the carrier proteins maintain the lower pH within the lysosomes.

Ans: moves / pump(s), hydrogen ions / protons, into the lysosome against concentration gradient ;
active transport / uses ATP / energy from respiration / ref to conformational change of carrier ;
R if a ref to facilitated diffusion 

1 (a) Photosynthesis is a complex process involving the transfer of light energy into chemical
energy.
(i) Describe the role of photosynthetic pigments.

Ans: any two from:
1 absorb / harvest / capture / trap, light / photons ;
2 (to) excite electrons ;
3 (for, cyclic / non-cyclic) photophosphorylation / electron transport chain ;
4 accessory pigment passes energy to, primary pigment / reaction centre ;
5 (pigments) form a, light harvesting cluster / photosystem / PSI / PSII ; 

 

(ii) Name the precise location in a chloroplast of photosynthetic pigments.

Ans: thylakoid membrane(s) / granum / grana / lamella(e) ; 

 

(iii) Name a practical technique to separate photosynthetic pigments.

chromatography ;

 

(b) The rate of photosynthesis is affected by many environmental factors.
A student carried out an experiment to investigate the relationship between the concentration
of carbon dioxide available to an aquatic plant, Cabomba caroliniana, and its rate of
photosynthesis.
Fig. 1.1 shows the experimental set-up for this investigation.

Sodium hydrogencarbonate solution was used as a source of carbon dioxide.
• The concentration of carbon dioxide was varied using six different concentrations of
sodium hydrogencarbonate solution.
• All C. caroliniana plants were kept in the dark before the light was switched on at
the start of the experiment.
• Five replicates were carried out at each concentration.
• The rate of photosynthesis was obtained by calculating the percentage change in
dissolved oxygen concentration in the solution over five minutes.
Fig. 1.2 shows the results of the investigation.

(i) With reference to Fig. 1.2, explain the pattern of results obtained between 0.25moldm–3
and 1.25moldm–3 of sodium hydrogencarbonate solution.

Ans: 1 (from 0.25) to 1.00 (mol dm–3), concentration / CO2, is limiting factor
or
at / >, 1.00 (mol dm–3), concentration / CO2, no longer limiting factor ;
2 at / >, 1.00 (mol dm–3), light intensity / temperature, is limiting factor ;
3 CO2, needed / used, for Calvin cycle / for light independent stage
or
CO2, reacts with / fixed by, RuBP ; 

 

(ii) The percentage change in dissolved oxygen for C. caroliniana at 0.00moldm–3 of sodium
hydrogencarbonate solution is negative.
Suggest reasons for this negative value.

Ans: little / no, photosynthesis ;
(aerobic) respiration uses oxygen ; 

 

(iii) To minimise temperature changes, the student decided to use an LED lamp as a light
source. LED lamps release very little heat energy.
Explain the importance of minimising temperature changes in this experiment

Ans: any three from:
1 to control a variable / to ensure a fair test / so CO2 is the only variable ;
2 low, temperature / kinetic energy, decreases, rate / reaction / photosynthesis / O2 production / O2 increase ;
3 low, temperature / kinetic energy, decreases, (named) enzyme-substrate, collisions / complexes ;
4 low(er) temperature, is a limiting factor / may limit rate ;
5 high, temperature / kinetic energy, decreases, rate / reaction / photosynthesis / O2 production / O2 increase ;
6 high, temperature / kinetic energy, denatures (named) enzyme(s) ;
7 high / increased, temperature, causes / increases, photorespiration ; 

 

2 (a) All organisms respire to release energy from energy-rich molecules such as glucose.
(i) Anabolic reactions use energy.
State two examples of anabolic reactions occurring in living organisms.

Ans: any two from:
idea of synthesis from smaller units
1 DNA replication / transcription ;
2 to, make / build up, (named) protein ;
3 to, make / build up, (named), lipid / triglyceride / phospholipid ;
4 to, make / build up, (named) carbohydrate / polysaccharide ;
5 phosphorylation ; 

 

(ii) Describe and explain the use of ATP in glycolysis.

Ans: any three from:
1 phosphorylates glucose
or
glucose
 glucose / fructose / hexose, phosphate ;
2 second phosphorylation
or
glucose / fructose / hexose, phosphate
 fructose / hexose, bi(s)phosphate ;
3 so glucose cannot leave the cell ;
4 activates / increases energy of / decreases stability of, glucose ; 

 

(b) Some factory workers in the early 20th century were exposed to chemical X and experienced
serious side-effects.
Some of the effects of exposure to chemical X are:
• decreased production of ATP
• increased lipid metabolism, with weight loss
• increased production of pyruvate and lactate
• excess heat energy release, causing an increase in body temperature, which can
be fatal.
Chemical X increases the permeability of the inner mitochondrial membrane to protons
(hydrogen ions), causing some protons to leak out into the matrix.

(i) Explain why people exposed to chemical X show:
• decreased production of ATP
• increased lipid metabolism.

Ans:  any three from:
decreased production of ATP
1 smaller / less steep, proton gradient ;
2 few(er) protons go through, ATP synth(et)ase / stalked particle ;
increased lipid metabolism
3 use / burn / respire, body fat / lipid stores ;
4 as less ATP made from, glucose / food ; 

 

(ii) Suggest and explain why chemical X causes increased production of pyruvate and
lactate

Ans: any two from:
1 more / faster / increased, (rate of) glycolysis ;
2 oxygen, decreased / used faster / shortage ;
3 (so) more / increased, anaerobic respiration ;

 

(iii) Suggest why excess heat energy is released.

Ans: any one from:
energy from, reduced NAD / ETC, released as heat ;
energy not used to join ADP and Pi so released as heat ; 

 

3 In 2014, scientists published a phylogenetic (evolutionary) tree diagram showing how and when
different groups of insects developed from ancestral groups.
To construct the diagram, the scientists compared nucleotide and amino acid sequence data for
1478 genes from each of 103 different insect species. The 103 species represented all 32 orders
of the class Insecta.
The data were used to arrange the species in related groups according to their degree of molecular
similarity and to track how sequences changed over time.
(a) (i) Outline three ways in which the members of a species are similar.

Ans: any three from:
(individuals
/ organisms
/ members of a species are similar
/ same)
1 morphologically ;
2 physiologically ;
3 biochemically ;
4 genetically ;
5 ecologically / occupy same niche ;
6 behaviourally ;
7 can (inter)breed to form fertile offspring ;
8 reproductively isolated (from other species) ;
9 share, an evolutionary lineage / recent common ancestor ;
10 share a, binomial / Linnaean, name ; 

 

(ii) Organisms are classified in a hierarchical system of taxonomic units.
Name the domain and kingdom to which insects belong.

Ans: domain: Eukarya ;
kingdom:
Animalia ;

 

(iii) Explain why a phylogenetic tree diagram is useful for classifying insect species.

Ans: any two from:
1 classification / taxonomy, reflects / shows / depends on, evolutionary / phylogenetic, relationships ;
2 organisms / species, that, are closely related / share recent common ancestor, should be classified together ;
3 help identify, larger taxonomic groups / orders / families / genera ;
4
AVP ;

 

(b) For this study, new software for processing large quantities of data was developed.
(i) Calculate the total number of sequences that were compared, considering both the
nucleotide and amino acid sequences for each gene.

Ans: (1478
× 103
× 2 =) 304 468 ;

 

(ii) Explain why this study needs to make use of bioinformatic techniques.

Ans: any three from:
1 to, store / analyse / process ;
2 large quantity of data ;
3 to, compare / match, (many) sequences ;
4 to, calculate / measure / quantify, (percentage), similarity / difference ;
5 ref. to fast / accurate / efficient ;

 

4 (a) Genetic engineering involves the manipulation of naturally occurring enzymes and processes.
List the enzymes used in genetic engineering (genetic modification) and outline their roles in
natural processes.

Ans: any five from:
1 (named) restriction, enzyme / endonuclease ;
2 cut / fragment, DNA ;
3 produced by / present in, bacteria / archaea / prokaryotes
or
to defend against, viruses / (bacterio)phages ;
4 (DNA) ligase ;
5 joins DNA / forms phosphodiester bonds / seals sugar-phosphate backbone ;
6 during DNA, repair / replication
or
joins Okazaki fragments ;
7 reverse transcriptase ;
8 forms / makes, (c)DNA from mRNA (template) ;
9 produced by / present in, retroviruses ;
10 DNA / Taq, polymerase ;
11 replicates / copies, DNA (at high temperatures) ;
12 produced by / present in, Thermus aquaticus ; 

 

(b) Genetically modified organisms (GMOs) include crop plants. Genetically modified (GM) crop
plants have been grown in North America in increasing quantities since 1996. They are now
grown in many areas of the world and are eaten by millions of people and farm animals.
Table 4.1 compares the area of land used to grow GM crop plants on six continents in 2013.
Table 4.1
continent
area of land used to
grow GM crop plants
/ million hectares
edible GM crop plants grown
Africa 3.5 maize, soybean
Asia 19.1 maize, papaya, tomato
Australasia 0.6 canola
Europe 0.2 maize
North America 81.1 canola, maize, papaya,
soybean, squash, sugar beet
South America 70.9 canola, maize, soybean

(i) Suggest how North America and South America benefit from growing large areas of GM
crop plants rather than non-GM crop plants.

Ans: any three from:
1 increased / higher / more, yield / production / harvest / food ;
2 increased / higher / better, quality of, produce / crops / food ;
3 decreased / lower / less, insecticide / pesticide, needed / used ;
4 decreased / lower / less, fuel use / CO2 emissions ;
5 potential for, set-aside / conservation areas (as less land needed for crops) ;
6 (described) comparative economic benefit ; 

 

(ii) Only a small area of land is used to grow GM crop plants in Europe. This is mainly
because most of Europe uses a ‘precautionary principle’. The precautionary principle
prevents GM crop plants being grown if there is a possible risk of harm to human health
or to the environment, even if there is no proof of harm.
Many European citizens have concerns about the safety of eating GM food, but Europe
imports large quantities of GM maize and GM soybean to feed farm animals.
Use this information and Table 4.1 to deduce two arguments in favour of growing more
GM crop plants in Europe.

Ans: any two from:
1 people in other (named) continents eat GM, food / crops ;
2 GM, food / crops, already in (European) food chain ;
3 ref. to economic benefit of reducing GM (animal food) imports ; 

 

(iii) Explain why the data in Table 4.1 are not enough to calculate the extent to which different
continents have replaced traditional crop plants with GM versions.

Ans: 1 do not know / need to know, total crop area / non-GM crop area ;
2 so can work out, percentage / fraction, of, GM / non-GM ;

 

5 (a) Nerves consist of bundles of different types of neurones.
Fig. 5.1 shows the mean transmission speed of impulses for three types of sensory neurone,
C, Aδ and Aβ.

Impulses from pain receptors in the skin are sent along sensory neurones C and Aδ.
• Sensory neurones C and Aδ synapse in the spinal cord with relay neurones known
as projection neurones.
• Projection neurones send impulses to the part of the brain that perceives pain.
• Impulses from touch receptors in the skin pass along sensory neurones Aβ, which
can also synapse with the projection neurones in the spinal cord.
• Sensory neurones Aδ and Aβ are myelinated.
• Sensory neurones C are unmyelinated.

(i) Describe the results shown in Fig. 5.1 and suggest explanations for these results.

Ans: any three from:
1 wider / thicker / larger diameter
 increases / higher, speed ;
2 large(r) membrane surface area so more ion movement ;
3 myelin
 increases / faster / higher, speed ;
4 saltatory conduction (in myelinated) ;
5 pairwise data comparison ;

 

(ii) Gently rubbing a damaged area of skin can reduce the perception of pain.
Suggest an explanation for this.

Ans: any one from:
1 impulses, for touch / in
Aβ neurones, travel faster ;
2 (Aβ neurones) inhibit, spinal cord / relay / projection, neurones ;
3
AVP ;

 

(b) Back pain in humans can be reduced by using a transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation
(TENS) machine.
A TENS machine uses electrical impulses to stimulate nerve endings near the site of the
pain.
It is thought that TENS triggers the release of natural painkillers called endorphins at
synapses.
Fig. 5.2 shows synapses in a pain pathway.

(i) Suggest and explain how endorphins may act to reduce pain.

Ans: any four from:
1 endorphins bind to (endorphin) receptors ;
2 stop, calcium ions / Ca2+, entering presynaptic knob ;
3 no / fewer, vesicles, move towards / fuse with, (presynaptic) membrane ;
4 no / less, acetylcholine / ACh, released ;
5 no / less, binding of ACh to postsynaptic receptors ;
6 no / less, depolarisation of postsynaptic, neurone / membrane ;
7 no / fewer, action potentials / impulses, to, pain centre / brain ; 

 

(ii) Suggest one disadvantage of using pharmaceutical drugs for reducing pain compared
to using TENS.

Ans: any one from:
1 (drug) dependency / addiction / tolerance ;
2 (drug) side-effects ;
3 expensive ;
4 work more slowly ; 

 

6 (a) Thermoregulation is the control of the core temperature of the body.
Thermoreceptors send information about a change in core temperature to the hypothalamus.
The hypothalamus controls the core temperature by sending impulses to activate several
physiological responses.
Table 6.1 lists physiological responses to a decrease in core temperature.
Complete Table 6.1 to explain how each response contributes to maintaining a core
temperature within narrow limits.

response explanation
blood vessels near the surface of the skin constrict
(narrow) less heat lost as, less / slower, blood (flow) at, skin / surface ;
shivering occurs muscle contraction, creates / generates / produces, heat ;
hairs rise trapped air, insulates / reduces thermal gradient ;
reduction in the production of sweat to stop / decrease, heat loss by evaporation ;

 

(b) Animals can also use behaviour to adapt to temperature changes.
Suggest why some animals curl up their bodies in cold weather.

Ans: decrease / less, surface area to, conserve / retain heat
or
decrease / less, surface area so less heat lost ; 

 

(c) The Sitatunga deer, Tragelaphus spekii, and the Nile monitor lizard, Varanus niloticus, live in
Africa.
Fig. 6.1 shows a Sitatunga and Fig. 6.2 shows a Nile monitor.

An investigation was carried out to measure the core temperature of the Sitatunga and the
Nile monitor as the environmental temperature was increased.
The results are shown in Fig. 6.3.

(i) Describe the results shown in Fig. 6.3.

Ans: any three from:
1 Sitatunga’s (core / body) temperature (fairly) constant ;
2 Nile monitor’s / lizard’s, (core / body) temperature rises as environmental temperature rises ;
3 figures for two animals at one temperature with units
or
one animal at two temperatures with units ;
4
AVP ;

 

(ii) When the environmental temperature is low, Nile monitors are relatively inactive.
Suggest one disadvantage to the Nile monitor of being inactive.

Ans: problem with, catching prey / feeding / avoiding predation ;

 

(d) Thermoregulation relies on negative feedback.
Explain what is meant by negative feedback.

Ans: 1 ref. to set point / norm(al) / ideal value ;
2 rise / fall / change / fluctuation ;
3 reversed / corrected / counter-acted ; 

 

7 People vary in which molecules are present on the surface of their red blood cells. For example, in
the ABO blood group system, people may be categorised into one of four blood groups: A, B, AB
and O.
A single gene, I, with three alleles, determines these blood groups. Gene I is an example of a
gene with multiple alleles.
• Alleles IA and IB are codominant.
• Allele Io is recessive to alleles IA and IB.
(a) Explain what is meant by codominant and recessive

Ans: codominant
1 both (alleles), affect / seen in / expressed in / contribute to (phenotype) ;
2 in heterozygote ;
recessive
3 affects / seen in / expressed / contributes to, (phenotype) (only) when dominant (allele) absent / in homozygote ;

 

(b) Table 7.1 shows a cross between a person with blood group A and a person with blood
group B.
Complete Table 7.1.

Ans: 

parental phenotype
A B
parental genotype IA Io IB Io
gametes I
A Io IB Io ;
offspring genotype I
A IB IA Io IB IO Io Io ;
offspring phenotype
AB
A B O ;

 

(c) Haemophilia is a blood condition where bleeding continues for a long period of time after a
blood vessel has been damaged.
A person with haemophilia has a mutation in a gene on the X chromosome, which results in
the lack of a blood clotting factor.
Explain why a man who has haemophilia cannot pass the condition to his male offspring.

Ans: any three from:
1 males / men / boys, are, XY / have (only) one X chromosome ;
2 man / father, passes Y to, male offspring / son ;
3 man / father, does not pass X to,
♂ offspring / son ;
4 man / father, passes, X / mutation, to, female offspring / daughter ;
5 woman / mother, passes X / mutation, to, male offspring / son ; 

 

8 (a) Humans use selective breeding to improve the features of crop plants and domestic
animals.
(i) State another term for selective breeding.

Ans: artificial selection ;

 

(ii) Describe how selective breeding can be used to improve the milk yield of dairy cattle.

Ans: any five from:
1 (humans) choose / cross / breed from, females / cows / cattle, with, good / high, milk yield ;
2 (humans) choose / cross / breed from, males / bulls, with, mother / sisters / daughters, with, good / high, milk yield ;
3 (humans) choose / cross / breed from, desirable offspring ;
4 continue / repeat, for (several) generations ;
5 allele(s) for, high milk yield / desired trait, passed on ;
6 increase in frequency of, good / best / high yield, allele(s) ;
7 artificial insemination / A.I. ;
8
AVP ;

 

(b) Explain what is meant by disruptive selection.

Ans: any three from:
1 mean / mode / median / average / intermediate, selected against / not favoured / less fit / die ;
2 (both) extremes, selected for / favoured / more fit / survive / reproduce ;
3 bimodal distribution ;
4 diversifying selection ;
5 causes / maintains, polymorphism / genetic diversity ;

 

Section B

9 (a) Describe how you would carry out an investigation to calculate the effect of substrate
concentration on the rate of respiration of yeast in anaerobic conditions using a redox
indicator, such as DCPIP or methylene blue.

Ans: any eight from:
1 vary / different / range of, glucose / fructose, concentrations ;
2 control / same, volume of yeast (suspension) ;
3 control / same, volume of glucose (solution) ;
4 control / same, volume / concentration, of indicator (solution) ;
5 control temperature (between 20–45oC) ;
6 oil layer to exclude, air / oxygen ;
7 indicator turns from blue (start / oxidised) to colourless (end / reduced) ;
8 due to, hydrogen atoms / H+ / electrons, from, glycolysis / dehydrogenation / respiration ;
9 time how long it takes for colour change OR fix time interval and measure with colorimeter ;
10 repeat experiment ;
11 calculate mean(s) ;
12 graph with glucose concentration (on
x axis) and, time taken / % absorbance / % transmission / rate (on
y) ;
13 rate is 1/t ;
14
AVP ; 

 

(b) Compare respiration in anaerobic conditions in mammalian tissue and in yeast cells.

Ans: any seven from:
both
1 occur in cytoplasm ;
2 (only) involve glycolysis ;
3 make, 2 (net) / small amount of, ATP ;
4 regenerate NAD (from NADH) ;
comparison
mammalian tissue yeast cells
5 H acceptor / reduction of pyruvate / pyruvic acid ethanal
6 (end) product lactate / lactic acid ethanol
7 no, CO2 /decarboxylation CO2
8 (enzyme) lactate dehydrogenase ethanol dehydrogenase
9 steps / stages one / 1 two / 2
10 (process) reversible irreversible 

 

10 (a) Explain how speciation can occur due to geographical separation.

Ans: any eight from:
1 named geographical barrier ; e.g. river / mountain / sea / lake
2 population, separated / divided (into two) ;
3 no, mating / breeding / gene flow, between, populations / groups ;
4 different (named), selection pressures / environments / conditions ;
5 different mutations ;
6 individuals with beneficial alleles, are selected for / survive / reproduce / have a selective advantage ;
7 genetic drift / founder effect ;
8 change in, allele frequency / gene pool ;
9 over a long time / many generations ;
10 can no longer (successfully), interbreed / reproduce / produce fertile offspring, with, old / original / other, population /
species ;
11 allopatric (speciation) ; 

 

(b) Using examples, explain why species may become extinct

Ans: any seven from:
1 environment changes ;
2 species cannot adapt (fast enough) ;
3 climate / temperature / sea level, change ;
4 extinct species / species at risk ;
5 competition / predation / disease, from, new / introduced / alien / invasive, species ;
6 extinct species / species at risk ;
7 (named) habitat, degradation / loss ;
8 extinct species / species at risk ;
9 hunting by humans / poaching / (over)fishing ;
10 extinct species / species at risk ;
11 AVP ;
12 extinct species / species at risk ;

1 The enzyme β-galactosidase catalyses the breakdown of the compound ONPG (o-nitrophenyl
1-D-galactopyranoside) to the compound ONP (o-nitrophenyl), as shown in Fig. 1.1.
ONPG
(colourless substrate)
β-galactosidase
ONP
(yellow product)
+ galactose
Fig. 1.1
As ONP is produced, the colour of the reaction mixture changes to yellow. The intensity of the
yellow colour produced is proportional to the concentration of ONP.
A colorimeter is used to measure the absorbance of the reaction mixture. Absorbance is a measure
of the light absorbed by a coloured solution. In the reaction shown in Fig. 1.1, the more intense the
yellow colour, the higher the absorbance.
(a) A student was provided with a stock solution of the enzyme β-galactosidase. The student
diluted this by a factor of 20 using a buffer solution of pH 8. The student made a final volume
of 10cm3 of dilute β-galactosidase solution.
Describe how the student prepared the 10cm3 of diluted β-galactosidase solution

Ans: 0.5 cm3 of the stock solution ;
idea of adding 9.5 cm3 of buffer / water / filling to the 10 cm3 mark with buffer / water (in a volumetric flask) ;

 

The student investigated the effect of substrate concentration on the enzyme-catalysed reaction
shown in Fig. 1.1.
(b) The student was provided with:
• the diluted β-galactosidase solution prepared in step (a), which was kept cold until
needed
• a stock solution of 1.0% ONPG made up in a buffered solution of pH 8.0
• a buffer solution of pH 8.0.
The procedure used by the student is outlined in step 1 to step 3.
1. The diluted β-galactosidase solution was mixed with 1.0% ONPG solution.
2. After 2 minutes a colorimeter was used to measure the absorbance of this mixture.
3. Steps 1 and 2 were repeated using different concentrations of ONPG solution.

(i) Suggest why the student used a colorimeter to measure the absorbance rather than
judging the intensity of the colour by eye.

Ans: idea that (result / it, is) quantitative / AW ; ora 

 

(ii) Identify the independent variable and the dependent variable in this investigation

Ans : independent variable:
concentration of ONPG / substrate ;
dependent variable:
absorbance (on colorimeter) ;

 

(c) The student decided to investigate the effect of inhibitors on the reaction shown in Fig. 1.1.
The student planned to add an inhibitor, inhibitor X, to reaction mixtures containing different
concentrations of ONPG solution.


(i) Describe a method the student could use to collect the data needed to test the effect of
inhibitor X in reaction mixtures containing different concentrations of ONPG solution.
The description of your method should be set out in a logical way and be detailed enough
for another person to follow.
You should not repeat the details from (a) describing how to dilute the stock solution of
β-galactosidase.

Ans: 

any eight from:
1 ref. to preparing / using at least five concentrations of ONPG
2 stated range of five dilutions, from 1%v down, with % units
3 method of keeping
β-galactosidase / enzyme, cold (prior to use) ;
4 idea of bringing enzyme and substrate to temperature / equilibrating, before mixing ;
5 method of keeping reactants / reaction mixture, at, constant / controlled / stated / standardised, temperature ;
6 same / constant / stated / standardised / known, volume / concentration / mass of,
X / inhibitor ;
7 same / constant / stated / standardised / known, volume of, ONPG / substrate ;
8 same / constant / stated / standardised / known, volume / concentration, of
β-galactosidase / enzyme ;
9 ref. to measuring absorbance / intensity of colour (on colorimeter) after one set time ;
10 additional detail of use of colorimeter ;
11 repeat at least twice / three replicates, and calculate mean ;
12 idea of repeating, whole experiment / range of concentrations, without
X / inhibitor ;
13 named hazard and risk and precaution ;

 

The student suggested that inhibitor X was acting as a competitive inhibitor.

(ii) On Fig. 1.3, sketch the curve expected if inhibitor X was acting as a competitive inhibitor.
[2]
Vmax is the maximum initial rate of reaction of the enzyme.
The Michaelis-Menten constant, Km, is the substrate concentration at which the initial rate of
reaction is half its maximum value, Vmax.

Ans: 1 curve, to the right of / below, original curve ;
2 curve / line, must meet the plateau of original curve on the graph ;

 

(iii) Draw on Fig. 1.3 the positions of Vmax and Km of the enzyme when no inhibitor X is
present.

Ans: 1 correct placement of Vmax ;
2 correct placement of K
m ;

 

(iv) Use your graph to describe the effect of the addition of inhibitor X on the Km of this
enzyme.

 

Ans:   (reaction with competitive inhibitor / X) has higher / has increased / increases, K
m value (compared to no inhibitor) ;

 

(d) Acid reflux is a condition where some of the stomach contents are forced back up into the
oesophagus (gullet). The main symptom is a burning pain in the oesophagus due to the
acidic contents of the stomach. Acid reflux that happens more than twice a week is called
gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD).
Two main types of drug are used to treat GERD:
• proton pump inhibitors (PPIs)
• H2 receptor antagonists (H2RAs)

Scientists carried out trials to investigate the effect of these drugs on the relief of acid reflux
symptoms in people suffering with GERD.
• 200 people were randomly divided into two groups, A and B.
• People in group A were given the PPI medication.
• People in group B were given the H2RA medication.
• The trial lasted for 16 weeks.
• In weeks 4, 8, 12 and 16, the people were asked to score their symptoms, using the
scale shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
scale symptom
1 none
2 minimal
3 mild
4 moderate
5 moderately severe
6 severe
7 very severe
• Mean values for each of the treatments A and B were calculated for weeks 4, 8, 12
and 16.
• People with a score of 1 were classified as showing removal of symptoms.
• People with a score of 2 or 3 were classed as showing improvement of symptoms.
The results of these trials are shown in Fig. 1.4 and Fig. 1.5.

The scientists analysed the data and concluded that PPIs should be used to treat acid reflux
rather than H2RAs.
With reference to the data in Fig. 1.4 and Fig. 1.5, discuss the conclusion that PPIs should be
used to treat acid reflux.

Ans:  assume ref. to PPI unless specific treatment stated
any three from:
1 idea that PPI overall is more effective / is immediately effective, on improvement / removal (of symptoms) ;
2
either
at 12 and 16 weeks / later, overlap of error bars means difference (in effect between PPI and H2RA) is not significant ;
or
at 4 and 8 weeks / earlier, no overlap of error bars – suggesting difference (in effect, between PPI and H2RA) may be,
significant ;
3 no statistical test to compare groups / t test, done (to test for significance) ;
4 idea that
H2RA is catching up / may be better in the long term ;
5 AVP ; ; any two from:
• less than 50% patients reported no symptoms
• no information on severity of symptoms pre-trial
• no data on side effects
• size of the two test groups not given
• no data on long term effects (where H2RA may be better) 

 

2 Inheritance of flower colour and flower position in pea plants are controlled by two genes.
• Gene P/p controls flower colour. Allele P for purple flowers is dominant to allele p for
white flowers.
• Gene A/a controls flower position. Allele A for flowers growing from the side of the shoot
(axial position) is dominant to allele a for flowers growing at the end of the shoot (terminal
position), as shown in Fig. 2.1.

A biologist predicted that, if the genes are on different chromosomes, the ratio of the phenotypes
of the F2 generation would be 9:3:3:1.
The biologist carried out a breeding experiment.
• Plants homozygous for white flowers and axial position were crossed with plants
homozygous for purple flowers and axial position.
• All the F1 plants had purple, axial flowers.
• The F1 plants were crossed with each other.
Table 2.1 shows the results for the F2 generation.
Table 2.1
F2 phenotype frequency
purple, axial flowers 1756
purple, terminal flowers 653
white, axial flowers 702
white, terminal flowers 234
total 3345

 

(a) The chi-squared test (χ2 test) was used to analyse the data in Table 2.1.
(i) State one reason why the chi-squared test (χ2 test) was used.

Ans: idea of compare / AW, observed and expected (data / results / ratios / phenotypes)
or
data is categoric / discrete / discontinuous / nominal ; 

 

(ii) State the null hypothesis that the biologist would use for this test

Ans:  idea of no (significant) difference between the observed and the expected (results)
or
idea of difference between observed and expected (results) is due to chance ;

 

(iii) Complete Table 2.2 and calculate the value of χ2 for the results of the F2 generation.
The equation for the calculation of χ2 is:
χ2 = ∑ (O – E)
2
E

Ans:

offspring phenotype O E ( )2 O E
E

purple axial flowers 1756 1882 (A 1881)
(1881.56250)
8.44
(8.379175)
purple, terminal flowers 653 627
(627.18750)
1.08
(1.062338)
white, axial flowers 702 627
(627.18750)
8.97
(8.923823)
white, terminal flowers 234 209 ;
(209.06250)
2.99 ;
(2.974608)
2 χ = 21.48 ;
(21.339944)
2 χ = 21.33 / 21.34 / 21.48 for mp3 (to allow for using calculator values or rounded values)

(iv) State the critical value at p < 0.05 for this χ2 test

Ans:  7.82 ;

 

(v) Use your calculated value of chi-squared (χ2) to:
• explain whether the null hypothesis should be accepted or rejected

• suggest a conclusion the biologist could make about the inheritance of the genes

Ans: 

apply ecf as needed
1 reject (null hypothesis) and state that, the calculated value / 2 χ , is higher than, 7.82 / the critical value / the critical value
they give in (iv) from the table ;
2 If null hypothesis rejected:
(between O and E): there is a significant difference / the difference is not due to chance
idea that there is a less than 5% probability that the difference is due to chance / there is a more than 95% probability
that the difference is not due to chance ;
3 From mp1 If null hypothesis rejected or mp2 If there is a significant difference
/ AW stated
idea that: genes are on the same chromosome / are not on different chromosomes / are linked / show autosomal
linkage / do not assort independently ;
A idea of, ‘may be / can be’, throughout

CHEMISTRY [9701]

Section A
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider to be
correct.
Use of the Data Booklet may be appropriate for some questions.
1 Which contains the largest number of hydrogen atoms?
A 0.10 mol of pentane
B 0.20 mol of but-2-ene
C 1.00 mol of hydrogen molecules
D 6.02  1023 hydrogen atoms


2 In which pair of species do both species have only one unpaired p electron?
A Ar+
and C– B B and Ti+ C F and Ga D Se–
and Si–


3 Phosphorus forms two chlorides. Phosphorus(III) chloride, PCl 3, is a covalent liquid.
Phosphorus(V) chloride is an ionic solid. One of the ions present is [PCl 4]
+
.
What is the shape of the PCl 3 molecule and the [PCl 4]
+
ion?
PCl 3 [PCl 4]
+
A pyramidal square planar
B pyramidal tetrahedral
C tetrahedral square planar
D trigonal planar tetrahedral

 

4 is the standard enthalpy of formation of methane.
is the standard enthalpy of combustion of carbon.
is the standard enthalpy of combustion of hydrogen.
CH4(g) + 2O2(g) CO2(g) + 2H2O(l)
Which expression is equivalent to ?
A – +
B
+ –
C

2
2 –
D
– +


5 The diagram shows the Boltzmann distribution for the same gas at two different temperatures, T1
and T2.
y
x
0
0
T1
T2
What is plotted on the y-axis and which line represents the higher temperature?
plotted on y-axis higher temperature
A number of molecules T1
B number of molecules T2
C molecular energy T1
D molecular energy T2


6 What is the minimum mass of oxygen required to ensure the complete combustion of 12 dm3
of
propane measured under room conditions?
A 60 g B 80 g C 120 g D 160 g

 

7 Why is the first ionisation energy of oxygen less than that of nitrogen?
A The nitrogen atom has its outer electron in a different subshell.
B The nuclear charge on the oxygen atom is greater than that on the nitrogen atom.
C The oxygen atom has a pair of electrons in one p orbital that repel one another.
D There is more shielding in an oxygen atom.


8 Which gas would behave most like an ideal gas under room conditions?
A helium
B nitrogen
C ammonia
D krypton


9 When hydrogen iodide is reacted with concentrated sulfuric acid, several reactions occur,
including:
8HI + H2SO4  H2S + 4H2O + 4I2
Which row gives the change in oxidation number of iodine and of sulfur in this reaction?
change in oxidation
number of iodine
change in oxidation
number of sulfur
A –1 +6
B –1 +8
C +1 –6
D +1 –8

 

10 The diagram represents the Haber process for the manufacture of ammonia from nitrogen and
hydrogen.
heat exchanger
condenser
catalytic
converter
N2 + H2
NH3
What is the purpose of the heat exchanger?
A to cool the incoming gas mixture to avoid overheating the catalyst
B to cool the reaction products and separate the NH3 from unused N2 and H2
C to warm the incoming gas mixture and shift the equilibrium to give more NH3
D to warm the incoming gas mixture and speed up the reaction


11 Which statement about catalysts is correct?
A They change the reaction pathway by increasing the activation energy.
B They increase the rate of reaction by lowering the enthalpy change of the reaction.
C They increase the number of particles that have sufficient energy to react.
D Heterogeneous catalysts are in the same state as the reactant.


12 Element X is in Period 3. Element X forms a solid oxide Y.
Y reacts with hot concentrated hydrochloric acid. Y reacts with hot aqueous sodium hydroxide to
form a compound in which X is part of an anion.
How many p electrons does one atom of X have in its outer shell?
A 0 B 1 C 2 D 3

 

13 The gaseous products of heating a mixture of Ca(OH)2 and NH4Cl are passed through solid CaO.
A single gaseous product, W, is collected.
A sample of W reacts with Cl 2(g) to produce two gases, X and Y.
X is an element. Y is acidic.
Y reacts with W to produce Z.
What are X and Z?
X Z
A N2 CaCl 2
B N2 NH4Cl
C O2 CaCl 2
D O2 NH4Cl


14 Q is a mixture of a Group 2 oxide and a Group 2 sulfate. Q contains equal amounts of the two
compounds.
Q is shaken with water and the resulting mixture filtered; a solid residue is obtained. There is no
reaction when the solid residue is shaken with HCl(aq). Shaking the filtrate with H2SO4(aq)
produces a white precipitate.
What could be Q?
A BaO + BaSO4
B BaO + MgSO4
C MgO + BaSO4
D MgO + MgSO4


15 Which substance will not be a product of the thermal decomposition of hydrated
magnesium nitrate?
A dinitrogen monoxide
B magnesium oxide
C oxygen
D steam

 

16 A 5 cm3
sample of 0.05moldm–3 sodium chloride is mixed with a 5 cm3
sample of 0.05moldm–3
potassium iodide. 10 cm3
of acidified 0.05moldm–3 silver nitrate is then added, followed by
concentrated ammonia solution.
What is seen after the addition of an excess of concentrated ammonia solution?
A a cream precipitate
B a white precipitate
C a yellow precipitate
D no precipitate


17 The volatility of the Group 17 elements, chlorine, bromine and iodine, decreases down the group.
What is responsible for this trend?
A bond length in the halogen molecule
B bond strength in the halogen molecule
C electronegativity of the halogen atom
D number of electrons in the halogen atom


18 Acid rain is a dilute solution of sulfuric acid.
Which pollutant also contributes to the formation of acid rain?
A carbon monoxide
B carbon dioxide
C nitrogen dioxide
D hydrocarbons


19 R is an oxide of Period 3 element T. 5.00 g of R contains 2.50 g of T.
What is T?
A magnesium
B aluminium
C silicon
D sulfur

 

20 Bromoethane reacts with cyanide ions, producing propanenitrile.
Which statement about the SN2 mechanism of this reaction is correct?
A The lone pair of electrons on C of CN–
attacks the carbon atom of the C–Br bond.
B The lone pair of electrons on C of CN–
attacks the carbocation formed when the C–Br bond
breaks.
C The lone pair of electrons on N of CN–
attacks the carbon atom of the C–Br bond.
D The lone pair of electrons on N of CN–
attacks the carbocation formed when the C–Br bond
breaks.


21 Which compound would produce two different carboxylic acids when treated with hot,
concentrated, acidified manganate(VII) ions?
ABCD


22 Which compound could show both cis-trans isomerism and optical isomerism?

 

23 Limonene is a hydrocarbon found in the rind of citrus fruits.
limonene
What is the molecular formula of limonene?
A C10H12 B C10H14 C C10H16 D C10H18

 

24 The compound cetyl palmitate, C15H31CO2C16H33, is a waxy solid.
Cetyl palmitate is heated under reflux with an excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide.
Which products will be formed?
A C15H31ONa and C16H33CO2Na
B C15H31CO2Na and C16H33ONa
C C15H31OH and C16H33CO2Na
D C15H31CO2Na and C16H33OH


25 When an organic compound is oxidised, any oxygen atom gained by the organic molecule is
considered to be from a water molecule also producing 2H+
+ 2e–
. Any hydrogen atom lost may
be considered to be lost as H+
+ e–
.
These changes can be represented by the following two equations.
H2O  [O] + 2H+
+ 2e–
[H]  H+
+ e–
Compound X is oxidised by heating under reflux with hot, acidified potassium dichromate(VI) for
one hour. The half-equation for the reduction reaction is shown.
Cr2O7
2– + 14H+
+ 6e–
 2Cr3+ + 7H2O
Under these conditions, one mole of potassium dichromate(VI) oxidises three moles of X.
What could X be?
A propanal
B propan-1-ol
C propan-1,2-diol
D propan-1,3-diol

 

26 Compound X has the empirical formula C2H4O. Its infra-red spectrum is shown.

What could be the skeletal formula of compound X?

 

27 How many moles of hydrogen, H2, are evolved when an excess of sodium metal is added to
one mole of citric acid?

 

28 Which statement is correct for the reaction of carbonyl compounds with HCN?
A The reaction is catalysed by concentrated H2SO4.
B Pentan-2-one and HCN react to give a chiral product.
C The reaction is a condensation reaction.
D The reaction is nucleophilic substitution.

 

29 The table describes four reactions of propene.
Which row is correct?
reagent used name of main
organic product
A aqueous bromine 2-bromopropane
B cold acidified aqueous potassium manganate(VII) propane-1,3-diol
C hydrogen chloride 2-chloropropane
D steam propan-1-ol


30 Butanoic acid is prepared from 1-bromopropane.
This synthesis requires a sequence of two reactions.
Which compound is prepared in the first stage of the synthesis?
A 1-aminopropane
B propan-1-ol
C butanal
D butanenitrile

 

Section B
For each of the questions in this section, one or more of the three numbered statements 1 to 3 may
be correct.
Decide whether each of the statements is or is not correct (you may find it helpful to put a tick against
the statements that you consider to be correct).
The responses A to D should be selected on the basis of
A B C D
1, 2 and 3
are
correct
1 and 2
only are
correct
2 and 3
only are
correct
1 only
is
correct
No other combination of statements is used as a correct response.
Use of the Data Booklet may be appropriate for some questions.


31 Ethanol combines with ethanoic acid to form ethyl ethanoate according to the following reaction.
C2H5OH(I) + CH3CO2H(I) CH3CO2C2H5(I) + H2O(I) ∆Ho
= –6 kJmol–1
9.2 g ethanol, 12 g ethanoic acid and 8.8 g ethyl ethanoate are mixed and allowed to stand at
298K, until equilibrium is reached.
(Mr: C2H5OH, 46; CH3CO2H, 60; CH3CO2C2H5, 88)
The resulting equilibrium mixture is found to contain 4.8 g ethanoic acid.
The experiment is repeated at 323K.
Which statements are correct?
1 There are 0.22 moles of ethyl ethanoate in the mixture at equilibrium at 298K.
2 The equilibrium mixture at 323K will contain more than 4.8 g of ethanoic acid.
3 If a small amount of water is added at the start of either experiment the value of Kc would not
be affected.

 

32 The diagram shows an incomplete energy profile diagram for a reaction.

Which reactions could this diagram refer to?
1 CaCO3(s)  CaO(s) + CO2(g)
2 H2(g)  2H(g)
3 Cl

(aq)  Cl

(g) + aq

 

33 A gaseous hydrocarbon has a density of 2.42 g dm–3 under room conditions.
What could be the skeletal formula of this hydrocarbon?

 

34 Which molecules contain at least one bond angle of 120?
1 C2H4
2 PF5
3 NCl 3


35 Which statements are correct going across Period 3 from sodium to chlorine?
1 The charge on the nucleus increases, pulling the electrons closer to it.
2 The radius of the most common ion of each element decreases.
3 The shielding caused by inner electrons decreases, so the outer electrons are pulled closer
to the nucleus.

 

The responses A to D should be selected on the basis of
A B C D
1, 2 and 3
are
correct
1 and 2
only are
correct
2 and 3
only are
correct
1 only
is
correct
No other combination of statements is used as a correct response.


36 Which statements are correct?
1 Magnesium carbonate decomposes at a lower temperature than calcium carbonate.
2 Calcium hydroxide is more soluble in water than magnesium hydroxide.
3 Calcium is a stronger reducing agent than magnesium.


37 Which statements are correct?
1 1,1-difluoroethane is less reactive than 1,1-dichloroethane.
2 1,1-difluoroethane is polar.
3 The C–F bond is stronger than the C–Cl bond.


38 Which pairs of compounds may be distinguished by testing with alkaline aqueous iodine?
1 butanal and butanone
2 pentan-2-one and pentan-3-ol
3 propanone and propan-2-ol
39 Which reactions have a coloured organic product?
1 ethanal + 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine reagent
2 ethanol + acidified potassium dichromate(VI)
3 ethene + cold dilute acidified potassium manganate(VII)
40 Propanoic acid is reacted with an excess of lithium aluminium hydride. The organic product of this
reaction is reacted with ethanoic acid in the presence of concentrated sulfuric acid, forming
product X.
What are major commercial uses of X?
1 fuel
2 solvent
3 flavouring

 

Ans:

 

Question Answer Marks
1 C 
2 C 
3 B 
4 D 
5 B 
6 B 
7 C 
8 A 
9 D 
10 D 
11 C 
12 B 
13 B 
14 A 
15 A 
16 C 
17 D 
18 C 
19 D 
20 A 
21 B 
22 B 
23 C 
24 D 
25 A 
26 A
27 C 
28 B 

29 C 
30 D 
31 A 
32 A 
33 D 
34 B 
35 D 
36 A 
37 A
38 B 
39 D 
40 C 

 

Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.
1 Ethanedioic acid, HO2CCO2H, has a relative molecular mass of 90.0.
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by the term relative molecular mass.

Ans: 

option 1
M1 the mass of a molecule OR the (weighted) average / (weighted) mean mass of the molecule(s) 1
option 1
and
M2 relative / compared to 1 / 12 (the mass) of an atom of carbon
–12
1
OR on a scale in which a carbon–12 atom / isotope has a mass of (exactly) 12 (units)
option 2
M1 mass of one mol of molecules
option 2
M2 relative / compared to 1 / 12 (the mass) of 1 mol of C-12 OR
which one mol C-12 (atom / isotope) has a mass of (exactly) 12 g

(ii) State the empirical formula of ethanedioic acid

Ans: CO2H

(iii) Calculate how many atoms of carbon are present in 0.18g of ethanedioic acid, HO2CCO2H.
Show your working. atoms of carbon present =

Ans: 0.18/90
× 2
× 6.02
× 1023 = 2.408
× 1021 (atoms) OR 2.4(1)
× 1021 (atoms)
M1 no mole ethanedioic acid 0.18 / 90 = 0.0020

M2 no mole ethanedioic acid
× 2 0.0020
× 2 = 0.0040 
M3 no mole ethanedioic acid
× 6.02
× 1023 2.4
× 1021

(b) Solid ethanedioic acid reacts with aqueous calcium ions to make a precipitate of
calcium ethanedioate, CaC2O4.
CaC2O4 breaks down when heated to form calcium oxide, carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide.
(i) Construct an equation to represent the reaction of CaC2O4 when heated. Include state
symbols.

Ans: CaC2O4(s)
 CaO(s) + CO2(g) + CO(g)
M1 correct formulae
M2 balancing equation AND state symbols. 

(ii) Identify the type of reaction which occurs when CaC2O4 is heated

Ans: (thermal) decomposition OR disproportionation 

(iii) Identify another compound containing calcium ions which will also produce carbon dioxide
and calcium oxide when it is heated.

Ans: calcium carbonate / CaCO3

2 Carbon monoxide gas, CO(g), and nitrogen gas, N2(g), are both diatomic molecules.
(a) The diagram shows the arrangement of outer electrons in a molecule of CO(g).

(i) State one similarity and one difference in the way the atoms in a carbon monoxide
molecule are bonded together compared to the atoms in a nitrogen molecule.

Ans: M1 both make triple (covalent) bond / 3 shared pairs of electrons 
M2 one bond in CO is coordinate / dative covalent / formed by donating a pair of electrons from O (to C) 

(ii) The table states the electronegativity values of carbon, nitrogen and oxygen atoms.
C N O
electronegativity 2.5 3.0 3.5
Use the electronegativity values and relevant details from the Data Booklet to complete
the table below.

Ans: N2 CO
number of
electrons per
molecule
14 14
type of van
der Waals’
temporary / instantaneous
dipole–induced dipole
permanent dipoles–
(permanent) dipoles
(and
temporary / induced /
instantaneous dipoles) 

 

(b) N2(g) is less reactive than CO(g) even though N2(g) has a lower bond energy than CO(g).
Suggest why CO(g) is more reactive than N2(g)

Ans: CO / it is a polar molecule / it has a (permanent) dipole (but N2 is non-polar) 

 

(c) Both carbon monoxide and nitrogen are gases at room temperature and pressure.
They both behave like ideal gases under certain conditions.
(i) State the two conditions necessary for these two gases to approach ideal gas behaviour.

Ans: high temperature AND low pressure

 

(ii) Explain why N2(g) behaves more like an ideal gas than CO(g) does at 20.0°C and 101kPa.

Ans: M1 CO is polar / has a permanent dipole OR N2 is non-polar 
M2 IMF in CO are (more) significant / larger OR IMF in N2 are smaller / less significant 
Alternative answer
M1 (Size of) N2 smaller than CO
OR volume of N2 molecules / particles smaller
Alternative answer
M2 volume of N2 molecules / particles is more negligible
ORA

 

(d) Calculate the amount, in mol, of pure nitrogen gas which occupies 100cm3
at 101kPa and
20.0°C.
Use relevant information from the Data Booklet. Show your working.
Assume nitrogen behaves as an ideal gas.

Ans: M1 correct conversion to consistent units
P = 101 000 V = 100 / 1 000 000 = (1
× 10–4) T = 293
M2 use of all values from M1 in correct relationship, n = PV / RT 
M3 calculation = 4.15
× 10–3 mol

 

3 Sodium halide salts react with concentrated sulfuric acid at room temperature.
(a) (i) Write an equation to represent the reaction of NaCl(s) with concentrated sulfuric acid.

Ans: NaCl + H2SO4  NaHSO4 + HCl
OR
2NaCl + H2SO4  Na2SO4 + 2HCl 

 

(ii) Name this type of reaction.

Ans: displacement / acid-base (reaction) 

 

(b) NaI(s) reacts with concentrated sulfuric acid, at room temperature, to form steamy fumes.
(i) Identify the chemical responsible for the steamy fumes.

Ans: hydrogen iodide / HI

 

(ii) The reaction of NaI(s) with concentrated sulfuric acid continues, forming several other
products, including a dark grey solid.
Identify the chemical responsible for the dark grey solid and one other product of this
further reaction

Ans: dark grey solid I2 / iodine 
other product
S / sulfur OR H2S / hydrogen sulfide
OR H2O / water / steam 

 

(c) Explain the differences in observations, at room temperature, when NaI(s) reacts with
concentrated sulfuric acid compared to those for NaCl(s).

Ans: M1 iodide ions are strong(er) reducing agents (than chloride ions) OR

M2
HI / iodide is oxidised OR HCl / chloride is not oxidised 

 

(d) Complete the equation for the reaction of Br –
with excess concentrated H2SO4 at room
temperature.
……Br –
+ ……H+
+ ……H2SO4 →

Ans: 2
Br– + 2
H+ +
H2SO4  Br2 + 2H2O + SO2

 

4 Aqueous bromine reacts with methanoic acid to form hydrogen bromide and carbon dioxide gas.
Br2(aq) + HCO2H(aq) → 2HBr(aq) + CO2(g)
The table shows the oxidation numbers of bromine and carbon in the species involved in this
reaction.
Br in Br2 C in HCO2H Br in HBr C in CO2
oxidation number 0 +2 –1 +4
(a) Identify the oxidising agent in this reaction. Explain your reasoning with reference to oxidation
numbers.

Ans: Br / bromine as the oxidation number of Br decreases / goes from 0
→ –1
OR
bromine as it causes oxidation number of C (in methanoic acid) to increase / go from (+)2
→ (+)4 

 

(b) Suggest one change you would observe, ignoring temperature changes, when bromine reacts
with methanoic acid.

Ans: (solution) turns (from brown / orange / red to) colourless / decolorises
OR brown / orange / red fades 

 

(c) This reaction can be followed by measuring the concentration of bromine present in the mixture
at regular time intervals.
The graph shows the change in concentration of bromine against time in a reaction carried out
at 20°C.

(i) Use the graph to calculate the average rate of reaction at 20°C during the first 600s. State
the units of this rate of reaction.
average rate of reaction ………………………………………. units ………………………………………

Ans: rate = total change in concentration of Br2 divided by time taken
calculation dependent on graph
(100
× 10–5 – 12
× 10–5) / 600
M1 average rate of reaction 1.47
× 10–6
1
M2 units mol dm–3
s–1

 

The experiment is repeated at a temperature of 40°C. This relatively small increase in
temperature produces a large increase in reaction rate.
(ii) Sketch a graph, on the same axes, to show the expected results when repeating the
experiment at 40°C. [1]

Ans: graph shown on same axes has steeper initial gradient
AND reaches the same final [Br2] 


(iii) The rate of reaction increases when the frequency of successful collisions between
reactant particles increases.
Explain why an increase in temperature produces this effect.

Ans: M1 (at increased temp the average kinetic) energy of particles / species / molecules increases. 1
M2 (many) more/greater proportion of particles with energy
⩾ Ea

 

(d) Complete the ‘dot-and-cross’ diagram, showing outer electrons only, to show the bonding in
methanoic acid, HCO2H.

Ans: M1 correct bonding electrons
1
M2 correct number of non-bonding electrons around each oxygen 

 

5 (a) Naphtha is a mixture which contains only hydrocarbon molecules.
(i) What is meant by the term hydrocarbon?

Ans: (compounds / molecules) containing only / entirely carbon and hydrogen (atoms) 

 

(ii) Name the raw material that is used to produce a sample of naphtha.

Ans: crude oil

 

(b) Compound V is found in naphtha. It has a molecular formula C10H22.
When V is heated at high pressure in the absence of air, an equal number of moles of ethene,
propene and W are made. W is a compound made of straight chain, saturated molecules.
(i) Name the process that describes this reaction.

Ans: (thermal) cracking 

 

(ii) Deduce the structure of W. Draw its structure below.

Ans: structure of W
OR CH3(CH2)3CH3 OR 

 

(c) Propene is separated from the mixture and heated in air in the presence of a catalyst. Propene
is oxidised to X, which contains two functional groups.
(i) Effervescence is seen when Na2CO3(aq) is added to X.
Identify the functional group present in X which is responsible for this observation

Ans: CO2H / carboxylic acid

 

(ii) Identify a reagent which could be used to show that X contains a C=C. Include relevant
observations.

Ans: M1 (add) Br2(aq) / bromine water 
M2 (solution) turns (from brown / orange / red to) colourless / decolorises
OR brown / orange / red fades 

 

(d) X reacts with another reagent to form Y.
Molecules of Y react together to form addition polymer Z. The diagram shows the repeat unit
of polymer Z.
O O–Na+
repeat unit of polymer Z
Draw the structural formula of monomer Y.

 

(e) Polymer Z is useful because it absorbs large amounts of water. However, there are problems
associated with the disposal of products containing polymer Z.
Combustion is not an appropriate method to dispose of pure Z because the process releases
harmful gases. Some of these gases contribute to the enhanced greenhouse effect.
(i) Identify a gas released during the combustion of Z which contributes to the enhanced
greenhouse effect.

Ans: carbon dioxide / CO2

 

(ii) Identify another gas which could be produced during the combustion of pure Z. Describe
a consequence, other than the enhanced greenhouse effect, of its release into the
atmosphere.

Ans: CO / hydrocarbons AND toxic / poisonous / harmful to health / (catalyses formation of) photochemical smog 

 

6 Propene, C3H6, reacts with H2O in the presence of an acid catalyst to form an alcohol with molecular
formula C3H8O.
(a) Name this type of reaction.

Ans: addition

 

(b) Name the catalyst used and state the conditions needed for this reaction to occur

Ans: M1 catalyst = sulfuric acid / phosphoric(
V) acid 
M2 conditions of reaction = steam / heat (and pressure)

 

(c) Complete the table to show the numbers of sigma (σ) bonds and pi (π) bonds present in
propene, C3H6, and C3H8O.

Ans: σ
π
C3H6 8 1
C3H8O 11 0 

 

(d) The reaction of propene, C3H6, with H2O occurs in a two-step mechanism. In step 1 C3H6 reacts
with the catalyst, H+
, to form a carbocation.
(i) Draw structures to identify the more stable and less stable carbocations which can form in
step 1. Explain your answer.

Ans: M1 more stable = CH3C+(H)(CH3)
M2 less stable = CH3CH2C+(H2) /
M3 greater (positive) inductive effect of two alkyl groups
OR greater electron donation of two alkyl groups owtte 

 

(ii) Name the major organic product formed from the reaction of propene, C3H6, with H2O.

Ans: propan-2-ol

 

(e) 2-bromopropane reacts to form propene, hydrogen bromide and water under certain conditions.
(i) Name this type of reaction

Ans: elimination 

 

(ii) Describe the reagents and conditions needed to favour this reaction.

Ans: M1 NaOH / KOH 
M2 ethanolic solution / ethanol / alcohol + heat

1 (a) The carbonates and hydroxides of Group 2 elements show similar trends in thermal stability.
Suggest and explain the variation in the trend in the thermal stability of the Group 2 hydroxides.

Ans: M1: increases down the group
M2: radius / size of (cat)ion / M2+ increases
M3: less polarisation / distortion of anion / hydroxide ion / hydroxide group / OH– / OH 

 

(b) Calcium hydroxide is slightly soluble in water.
(i) Write an equation to show the dissociation of calcium hydroxide, Ca(OH)2(s), in aqueous
solution. Include state symbols.

Ans: Ca(OH)2(s)
⇌ Ca2+(aq) + 2OH–(aq) 

 

(ii) Calculate the solubility, in moldm–3, of Ca(OH)2.
[Ksp: Ca(OH)2, 5.02 × 10–6mol3 dm–9]

Ans: M1:
Ksp = [Ca2+][OH–]
2
OR
Ksp = 4×3
M2: x = 3√5.02
× 10–6 / 4 = 0.0108 / 0.011 / 1.08
× 10–2 / 1.1
× 10–2 (mol dm–3) min 2 sf M1:
Ksp = [Ca2+][OH–]
2
OR
Ksp = 4×3
M2: x = 3√5.02
× 10–6 / 4 = 0.0108 / 0.011 / 1.08
× 10–2 / 1.1
× 10–2 (mol dm–3) min 2 sf 

 

(iii) Suggest how the solubility of Ca(OH)2 in aqueous NaOH compares to its solubility in
water.
Explain your reasoning.

Ans: less soluble / decreases due to the common ion effect
OR
decreases as equilibrium in (b)(i) has shifted to the left
OR
decreases as [OH–] increases causing [Ca2+][OH–](2) to exceed its
Ksp

 

2 (a) Explain why chromium complexes are coloured.

Ans: M1: (complexes have two sets of) d orbital(s) of different energy / d-d splitting occurs
OR d orbital(s) / d (sub)-shell splits
OR (inferred from a movement of an electron) from a lower d to higher d orbital
M2: electron(s) promoted / excited
OR electron(s) moves to higher (d–)orbital
OR electron(s) jumps up (to d–orbital) / jumps to higher (d–orbital)
M3: wavelength / frequency / light / photon / h
ν absorbed
OR radiation / energy from visible (region) absorbed
M4: colour seen is complementary (to colour absorbed)
OR wavelength / frequency / colour / light not absorbed is transmitted / reflected / seen 

 

(b) Four different compounds can be obtained when anhydrous chromium(III) chloride reacts with
water under various conditions. When samples of each compound are reacted separately with
aqueous silver nitrate, different amounts of silver chloride are precipitated. The precipitation
leaves the complex ions P, Q, R and S in solution.
formula of
compound
moles of AgCl precipitated
per mole of complex ion complex ion property of
complex ion
CrCl 3(H2O)6 3 P non-polar
CrCl 3(H2O)5 2 Q polar
CrCl 3(H2O)4 1 R polar
CrCl 3(H2O)4 1 S non-polar
(i) Draw three-dimensional diagrams for the structures of complex ions P, Q, R and S.
Include the charges for each complex ion.

Ans: M1: All charges
M2: One octahedral with correct 3D
M3: All formulae
M4: R is cis, S is trans 

 

(ii) Suggest why complex ion S is non-polar.

Ans: dipoles cancel 

 

(c) The structure of picolinic acid is shown.

The conjugate base of picolinic acid is a bidentate ligand, Z.
(i) Define the term bidentate ligand.

Ans: M1: (a species) that donates two lone pairs / forms two coordinate bonds / two dative bonds
M2: to a metal atom / metal ion 

 

(ii) Draw the structure of Z.

Ans: structure of the picolinate anion ligand

 

(iii) Z reacts with aqueous chromium(III) ions, [Cr(H2O)6]
3+, in a 3:1 ratio to form a new neutral
complex.
State the coordination number and the geometry of the chromium(III) centre in the
complex.
coordination number ………………………………….. geometry ………………………………….. [1]

Ans: (coordination number) six
AND (geometry around Cr) octahedral

 

(d) (NH4)2Cr2O7 decomposes readily on heating to form Cr2O3, steam and an inert colourless gas.
(i) Deduce the oxidation numbers of chromium in (NH4)2Cr2O7 and in Cr2O3.
(NH4)2Cr2O7 …………………………………………… Cr2O3 …………………………………………… [1]

Ans: (NH4)2Cr2O7 +6
Cr2O3 +3 

 

(ii) Construct an equation for the thermal decomposition of (NH4)2Cr2O7.

Ans: (NH4)2Cr2O7 → N2 + Cr2O3 + 4H2O

 

3 (a) (i) Define the term transition element.

Ans: (an element) forming stable ion / ions / compound(s) / oxidation state(s)
AND with partially filled / incomplete
AND d orbitals / d subshell / d shell 

 

(ii) State how the melting point and density of iron compare to those of calcium.

Ans: (melting point) higher
AND (density) higher

 

(b) (i) Define the term standard cell potential, .

Ans: M1: emf / potential difference / difference in electrode potential between two half-cells / two electrodes (in a cell)
M2:
(all solutions being) 1 mol dm–3
AND either 1 atm OR 298 K 

 

(ii) Draw a fully labelled diagram of the apparatus that can be used to measure the cell potential
of a cell composed of a Cu(II)/Cu electrode and an Fe(III)/Fe(II) electrode. Include all
necessary reactants.

Ans: salt bridge, voltmeter, Cu(s), Cu2+(aq), Pt(s), Fe2+ and Fe3+(aq)
two for one mark, four for two marks, six for three marks 

 

(c) The reaction between S2O8
2–(aq) and I –
(aq) is catalysed by adding a few drops of Fe3+(aq).
(i) Use equations to show the catalytic role of Fe3+ in this reaction.

Ans: M1: 2I– + 2Fe3+
→ I2 + 2Fe2+
M2: S2O82– + 2Fe2+
→ 2SO42– + 2Fe3+

 

(ii) Fe3+(aq) can oxidise I –
(aq), whereas [Fe(CN)6]
3–(aq) cannot oxidise I –
(aq).
Use Eo
values to explain these observations.

Ans: M1: I2 / I– +0.54 V AND Fe3+ / Fe2+ + 0.77 V AND [Fe(CN)6]3– / [Fe(CN)6]4– +0.36 V
M2:
Eo of I2 / I– is more positive / greater than
Eo of [Fe(CN)6]3– / [Fe(CN)6]4–
OR
Eocell = –0.18 V so no reaction occurs
OR
Eo of Fe3+ / Fe2+ is more positive / greater than
Eo of I2 / I–
OR
Eocell = 0.23 V so reaction occurs [1] 

 

(d) When aqueous solutions of S2O8
2– and tartrate ions are mixed the reaction proceeds very
slowly. However, this reaction proceeds quickly in the presence of an Fe3+(aq) catalyst.
The overall equation for this reaction is shown.

(i) Suggest why this reaction is slow without the Fe3+ catalyst.

Ans: S2O82– and tartrate ions are both negatively charged / both reactants same charge
AND
so repel each other OR have a high
Ea

 

(ii) Use the overall equation to deduce the half-equation for the oxidation of tartrate ions,
C4H4O6
2–, to carbon dioxide, CO2, and methanoate ions, HCO2

.
C4H4O6
2– + ……………………. …………………………………………………………….

Ans: C4H4O62– + 2H2O
⇌ 2CO2 + 2HCO2
– + 6H+ + 6e– 

 

(e) (i) Complete the following table to show the structures of the organic products formed when
tartaric acid reacts separately with each reagent. Identify each type of reaction.

Ans: M1: product with LiAlH4
M2: product with CH3COCl
M3: both types of reaction 

 

(ii) Tartaric acid reacts with the amine 1-phenylethylamine, C6H5CH(NH2)CH3, to form an
ionic salt.
Draw the structure of the salt formed in this reaction. Include the charges on the ions.

Ans:  dianion of tartrate with two cations present 

 

4 (a) Samples of [Cu(H2O)6]
2+ are reacted separately with an excess of aqueous sodium hydroxide
or with an excess of aqueous ammonia.
Give the following information about these reactions.
(i) reaction 1: [Cu(H2O)6]
2+ with an excess of aqueous of sodium hydroxide
colour and state of the copper-containing species

Ans: M1: blue solid / blue ppt
M2:
[Cu(H2O)6]2+ + 2OH– → Cu(OH)2 + 6H2O
OR [Cu(H2O)6]2+ + 2OH– → Cu(OH)2(H2O)4 + 2H2O
M3: precipitation / acid-base 

 

(ii) reaction 2: [Cu(H2O)6]
2+ with an excess of aqueous ammonia
colour and state of the copper-containing species

Ans: M1: dark blue solution / deep blue solution
M2: [Cu(H2O)6]2+ + 4NH3 → [Cu(NH3)4(H2O)2]2+ + 4H2O
M3: ligand exchange / substitution / displacement / replacement 

 

(b) Copper(I) oxide is added to hot dilute sulfuric acid. A blue solution, X, and a red-brown solid,
Y, form.
Suggest the identities of X and Y. Name the type of reaction.

Ans:M1:
X CuSO4 and
Y Cu
M2: type of reaction = redox / disproportionation 

 

5 Dinitrogen pentoxide, N2O5, is dissolved in an inert solvent (solv) and the rate of decomposition
of N2O5 is investigated. This reaction produces nitrogen dioxide, which remains in solution, and
oxygen gas.
N2O5(solv) → 2NO2(solv) + 1
2O2(g)
(a) Suggest what measurements could be used to follow the rate of this reaction from the given
information.

Ans: measure volume / amount of oxygen formed / mass lost / and time / against time / per unit time
OR
measure absorbance / transmission against time / per unit time 

 

(b) In a separate experiment, the rate of the decomposition of N2O5(g) is investigated.
N2O5(g) → 2NO2(g) + 1
2O2(g)

The reaction is first order with respect to N2O5. This can be confirmed from the graph using
half-lives.
(i) Explain the term half-life of a reaction.

Ans: time taken for the concentration / mass / amount
of a reactant to fall to half (its original value) / to halve

 

(ii) Determine the half-life of this reaction. Show your working on the graph.
half-life = ………………………… s [1]

Ans: t1 / 2 = 150 s
AND evidence on graph / paper of one half-life 

 

(iii) Suggest the effect on the half-life of this reaction if the initial concentration of N2O5 is
halved.

Ans: no change

 

(c) (i) Use the graph in 5(b) to determine the rate of reaction at 200s. Show your working.
rate = …………………………
units = …………………………
[2]
The rate equation for this reaction is shown.
rate = k [N2O5]

Ans:  M1: evidence on graph of tangent AND 4 to 5
× 10–4
M2: mol dm–3
s–1 

 

(ii) Use your answer to (c)(i) to calculate the value of the rate constant, k, for this reaction and
state its units.
k = ………………………… units ………………………… [1]

Ans: (c)(i) / 0.10 AND s–1

 

(d) Nitrogen dioxide reacts with ozone, O3, as shown.
2NO2 + O3 → N2O5 + O2
The rate equation for this reaction is rate = k[NO2][O3].
Suggest a possible two-step mechanism for this reaction.

Ans: M1: NO2 + O3 → NO3 + O2
M2: NO2 + NO3 → N2O5

 

(a) Compare and explain the relative acidities of butanoic acid, ethanol, ethanoic acid and water.
…………………………… > …………………………… > ………………………….. > …………………………..
most acidic least acidic

Ans: M1: ethanoic acid > butanoic acid > water > ethanol
M2: a reason given in terms of an electron donating or an electron withdrawing group for one of:
strengthening of O–H bond OR weakening of O–H bond OR stability of anion
Two out of the three alternatives M3, M4 and M5:
M3: ethanol: positive inductive effect / electron donating effect of ethyl / alkyl / R group
M4: butanoic acid: positive inductive effect / electron donating effect of propyl / alkyl / R group
M5: (either ethanoic or butanoic) acid: negative inductive effect of either C=O or carbonyl OR negative charge delocalised
over COO–

 

(b) Three carboxylic acids, methanoic acid, HCO2H, ethanedioic acid, HO2CCO2H, and
butanedioic acid, HO2CCH2CH2CO2H, are compared. Two tests were carried out on separate
samples of each organic acid, as shown.
The following results were obtained.
(i) Complete the table with the reagents and conditions and the observed change for a
positive test.
Assume these organic acids all have a similar acid strength.

(i) Complete the table with the reagents and conditions and the observed change for a
positive test.
Assume these organic acids all have a similar acid strength.

Ans: reagents and conditions observed change
test 1
Tollen’s reagent, warm
OR
Fehling’s solution, warm
silver mirror
(brick) red ppt / solid
test 2 acidified MnO4
–, warm decolourises OR bubbles
M1 / M2: reagents and conditions
× 2
M3: observations both correct 

 

(ii) Each compound, HCO2H, HO2CCO2H and HO2CCH2CH2CO2H, is dissolved seperately in
CDCl 3. Proton (1
H) NMR and carbon-13 (13C) NMR spectra are then obtained.

Ans: compound number of peaks in proton NMR number of peaks in carbon-13 NMR
HCO2H 2 1
HO2CCO2H 1 1
HO2CCH2CH2CO2H 2 2
one mark for three, four or five correct
two marks for six correct 

 

(iii) The proton NMR spectrum of HCO2H in D2O is obtained.
Describe and explain the difference observed between this spectrum and the proton NMR
spectrum of HCO2H in (b)(ii).

Ans: OH peak disappears AND proton / H exchanges with deuterium 

 

(c) 1,4-dibromobutane, Br(CH2)4Br, is used in the synthesis of the dicarboxylic acid J and diamine K
as shown.

(i) Draw the structures of G and H in the boxes.

Ans: G = HOCH2CH2CH2CH2OH
H = NCCH2CH2CH2CH2CN 

 

(ii) Suggest reagents and conditions for each of steps 1 to 4.

Ans: M1: step 1 NaOH(aq) + heat
M2: step 2 acidified KMnO4 + heat / acidified K2Cr2O7 + heat
M3: step 3 CN– / KCN / NaCN + heat
M4: step 4 LiAlH4 ALLOW Na in ethanol or H2 + Ni / Pd / Pt

 

(d) Polyamide L can be synthesised from dicarboxylic acid J, HO2C(CH2)2CO2H, and diamine K,
H2N(CH2)6NH2.
Draw the repeat unit of the polymer formed in the box. Any functional groups should be shown
displayed.

Ans: M1: correct displayed amide linkage
M2: the rest of the repeat unit correct including trailing bonds

 

7 (a) 3-aminobenzoic acid can be synthesised from methylbenzene in three steps.
methylbenzene.

(i) Draw the structures of M and N in the boxes.

 

(ii) Suggest reagents and conditions for each step of the synthesis.

Ans: M1: step 1 hot KMnO4 / MnO4

M2: step 2 conc. H2SO4 and conc. HNO3
M3: step 3 Sn and conc. HCl (heat) 

 

(b) A mixture of serine, HOCH2CH(NH2)CO2H, and lysine, H2N(CH2)4CH(NH2)CO2H, reacts to form
several different products.
(i) Draw the structures of the two structural isomers with the molecular formula C6H12N2O5
that could be present in the product mixture.
The functional group formed in each case should be displayed.

Ans: M1 / M2: each structure
M3: both displayed linkage

 

(ii) Predict the number of different structural isomers with the molecular formula C9H19N3O4
that could be present in the product mixture.

Ans: molecular formula number of structural isomers formed
C9H19
N3O4 4 

 

(c) Glutathione is a naturally occurring compound found in plants.

(i) On the diagram of glutathione, label each chiral centre with an asterisk (*). [1]
(ii) Draw the structures of the three products formed after complete acid hydrolysis of
glutathione. Assume the thiol group, –SH, does not react

 

(iii) Glutathione is soluble in water.
By referring to the structure of glutathione, explain why glutathione is soluble in water.

 

(a) The sketch graph for the titration of ethanoic acid, CH3CO2H, with sodium hydroxide is shown.

(i) In the region circled on the graph, identify the two organic species that are present in
the solution. Explain why the pH of the mixture only changes slowly and gradually in this
region when sodium hydroxide is being added.
two species present

Ans: M1: CH3CO2H and CH3CO2

M2: due to buffering action / acting as a buffer solution
M3: CH3CO2H reacts with NaOH / OH– (forming CH3CO2
– and water)
OR OH- reacts with H+ and equilibrium CH3CO2H
⇌ CH3CO2
– + H+ shifts to the right 

 

(ii) The equivalence point in this acid-base titration is where the two solutions have been
mixed in exactly equal molar proportion.
Suggest why the pH is greater than 7 at the equivalence point in this titration.

Ans: identifying CH3CO2
– is present (with water) at the equivalence point
OR CH3CO2
– react with water forming OH–
OR titrating a weak acid with a strong base 

 

(b) An impure sample of ammonium vanadate(V), NH4VO3, with mass 0.150g, is dissolved in an
excess of dilute acid.
In this solution all vanadium is present as VO2
+
ions. An excess of zinc powder is added to the
solution and all the VO2
+
ions are reduced to V2+ ions. The mixture is filtered to remove any
remaining zinc powder.
VO2
+
+ 4H+
+ 3e–
→ V2+ + 2H2O
When the resulting solution is titrated, 20.10cm3
of 0.0250moldm–3 acidified MnO4

oxidises all
V2+ ions back to VO2
+
ions.
MnO4

+ 8H+
+ 5e–
Mn2+ + 4H2O
Calculate the percentage by mass of NH4VO3 in the 0.150g impure sample of NH4VO3.
Give your answer to three significant figures.
[Mr
: NH4VO3, 116.9] percentage by mass of NH4VO3 = ………………………… % [3]

Ans: M1: moles MnO4
– = 0.025
× 0.0201 = 5.025
× 10–4
moles V2+ = 5.025
× 10–4
× 5 / 3 = 8.375
× 10–4
M2: moles VO3
– = 8.375
× 10–4
mass of NH4VO3 = 116.9
× 8.375
× 10–4 = 0.0979 g
M3: % Purity of NH4VO3 = 100
× 0.0979 / 0.15 = 65.3 must be 3 sf 

 

9 The carbon-13 (13C) NMR spectrum of compound A, C8H8O2, contains six peaks.
Compound A reacts with an excess of bromine water to give compound B, C8H6Br2O2.
Compound A reacts with alkaline aqueous iodine to form a yellow precipitate C and compound D.
Compound D reacts with PCl 5 to form compound E, C7H5O2Cl.
Compound E reacts with propan-2-ol to form compound F.
Draw the structures of compounds A, B, C, D, E and F in the boxes

 

1 Hydrogen peroxide decomposes slowly at room temperature to give water and oxygen.
2H2O2(aq) → 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
The initial rate of this reaction can be increased by the addition of a metal oxide catalyst.
A student is asked to investigate which metal oxide catalyst is best at increasing the initial rate of
this reaction by using a method which involves the collection of oxygen.
The student is provided with the following metal oxides: copper(II) oxide, iron(III) oxide,
manganese(IV) oxide, nickel(II) oxide and titanium(IV) oxide.
The student is also provided with an excess volume, of a known concentration, of aqueous hydrogen
peroxide and any laboratory equipment needed.
(a) (i) State the independent variable.

Ans: the metal oxide

 

(ii) State the dependent variable

Ans: count bubbles in a set time
OR measure volume (of oxygen) in a certain time
OR measure time to produce a certain volume 

 

(b) State two variables that would need to be controlled

Ans:  Any two from:
the volume of the hydrogen peroxide / solution
the concentration of the hydrogen peroxide
temperature
particle size

 

(c) Draw a labelled diagram of the assembled apparatus that could be used to carry out these
experiments. The apparatus should allow the accurate recording of the oxygen produced.

Ans:  M1: contents of flask
M2: sealed apparatus
M3: collection of the gas in a measuring cylinder (graduations assumed) (via a delivery tube into water) / gas syringe

 

(d) (i) What measurements need to be recorded during the course of each experiment to allow
the initial rate to be determined?

Ans: volume of gas / oxygen AND time

 

(ii) How is the initial rate determined using these measurements?

Ans: plot a (volume / time) graph AND measure gradient / produce a tangent at t = 0 or at the start 

 

(e) How can the student ensure that the results are reliable?

Ans: repeat (the experiments / trials) (until consistent results) 

 

(f) Suggest an alternative method to investigate these reactions which does not include the
collection of gas.

Ans:  measuring the decrease / change in (total) mass of the solution / mixture / reaction vessel (and contents) (and time)
OR
measuring the mass / weight of the mixture/reaction vessel (and contents) AND time

 

(g) Once the reaction has finished, how can the student demonstrate that the metal oxide has not
been affected by the reaction?

Ans: M1: (filter/remove) dry the residue/metal oxide
M2: weigh the residue / metal oxide to see if the mass is unchanged
OR
M1: re-use with new hydrogen peroxide / do the same reaction again with the same catalyst
M2: and check if the gas volumes identical / rate of reaction the same 

 

(h) When aqueous hydrogen peroxide is stored there is a small hole in the lid of the bottle.
Suggest why this is necessary

Ans: to allow the oxygen / gas (that is formed) to be released / escape / diffuse out 

 

2 A student is given 250.0cm3
of solution containing a mixture of Fe2+ and Fe3+ ions. The student
is asked to find the total mass of iron ions and the percentage by mass of Fe3+ in the solution by
performing titrations with aqueous potassium manganate(VII), KMnO4.
The student is told that the Fe3+(aq) ions can be reduced to Fe2+(aq) ions by reaction with zinc.
The student is given the following instructions.
● Calculate the mass of KMnO4 needed to make 500.0cm3
of 0.0200moldm–3 KMnO4(aq).
● Record the mass of an empty plastic weighing boat (a small container used to hold solid
samples).
● Add the calculated mass of KMnO4 to the weighing boat.
● Transfer the KMnO4 from the weighing boat into a 100cm3
beaker.
● Add 50cm3
of distilled water to the beaker.
● Transfer the mixture from the beaker into a 500.0cm3
volumetric flask.
● Make up to the graduation mark, dropwise, with distilled water.
(a) (i) Calculate the mass of KMnO4 needed to make 500.0cm3
of 0.0200moldm–3 KMnO4(aq).
[Ar
: K, 39.1; Mn, 54.9; O, 16.0] mass of KMnO4 needed = ………………………… g [1] 

Ans: Mr KMnO4 = 158.0
500
× 0.02 / 1000 = 0.01
0.01
× 158.0 = 1.58 g 

 

(ii) The student used a balance accurate to two decimal places.
Calculate the percentage error in weighing the mass of the KMnO4 by difference.
If you were unable to calculate a value for 2(a)(i) use the mass 1.75g. This is not the
correct answer to 2(a)(i). Show your working.
percentage error = ………………………… % [1]

Ans: (2
× 0.005 / 1.58)
× 100 = 0.63% 

 

(iii) The student noticed that some crystals of KMnO4 were stuck to the weighing boat after
adding the KMnO4 solid to the beaker.
State how the student should modify the instructions to ensure that the measured mass of
KMnO4 was accurate.

Ans: rinse the solid off the weighing boat into the beaker
OR
weighing the mass directly into the beaker
OR
(re)-weigh the weighing boat after transferring the KMnO4 into the beaker

 

(iv) Give two additional instructions that should be given to the student to ensure that the
solution is prepared as accurately as possible.

Ans: Any two from:
stir / agitate / mix (to ensure that the solid has dissolved)
rinse the beaker and transfer the washings
shaking / inverting / homogenising of volumetric solution

 

(b) When the KMnO4(aq) is ready for use, the student is given additional instructions.
step 1 Fill a burette with 0.0200moldm–3 KMnO4(aq).
step 2 Using a measuring cylinder, transfer 25.00cm3
of Fe2+(aq)/Fe3+(aq) solution into a
conical flask.
step 3 Add 10cm3
of 1.0moldm–3 sulfuric acid to the conical flask.
step 4 Titrate this acidified solution of Fe2+(aq)/Fe3+(aq) with 0.0200moldm–3 KMnO4(aq)
until the end-point.
step 5 Repeat titrations until the titres are concordant.
This set of results is set A.
step 6 Using a measuring cylinder, add 100cm3
of the Fe2+(aq)/Fe3+(aq) solution into a
beaker then add excess zinc. Allow time for reduction to Fe2+(aq) to take place.
step 7 Filter the mixture into a beaker.
step 8 Transfer 25.00cm3 of the filtrate into a conical flask and add 10cm3
of 1.0moldm–3
sulfuric acid.
step 9 Titrate this acidified solution of the filtrate with 0.0200moldm–3 KMnO4(aq) until the
end-point.
step 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 twice.
This set of results is set B.
(i) How should the burette be prepared for use before it is filled in step 1?

Ans:rinse / run through / wash the burette with some of the KMnO4 solution
OR run some of the KMnO4 solution from the burette to fill to the tip 

 

(ii) What must be done to ensure as accurate an end-point as possible?

Ans: add the KMnO4 dropwise (near the end point)

 

(c) (i) Identify an experimental weakness in step 2. Explain how this would affect the results.

Ans: the Fe2+(aq) / Fe3+(aq) mixture measured using a measuring cylinder
AND
leads to increased likelihood of non-concordant titres 

 

(ii) How could this weakness be overcome?

Ans: (measure the volume) using a (volumetric / 25 cm3) pipette

 

(d) The results for each set of titrations are shown.
set A
rough titration 1 titration 2 titration 3
final volume/cm3 18.40 17.25 34.55 18.00
initial volume/cm3 0.65 0.15 17.25 0.95
titre/ cm3
set B
rough titration 1 titration 2 titration 3
final volume/cm3 45.05 43.60 43.70
initial volume/cm3 0.20 0.15 0.10
titre/ cm3
(i) Complete both tables and calculate an appropriate average titre for each set of results.
The student could not carry out titration 3 in set B.
Record the average titre to one decimal place.
set A average titre = ………………………… cm3
set B average titre = ………………………… cm3
[2]

Ans: Set A
rough titration 1 titration 2 titration 3
final volume / cm3 18.40 17.25 34.55 18.00
initial volume / cm3 0.65 0.15 17.25 0.95
titre / cm3 17.75 17.10 17.30 17.05
mean titre = 17.1 (cm3)
Set B
rough titration 1 titration 2
final volume / cm3 45.05 43.60 43.70
initial volume / cm3 0.20 0.15 0.10
titre / cm3 44.85 43.45 43.60
mean titre = 43.5 (cm3)
M1: correct titres (to 2 decimal places)
M2: correct means 

 

(ii) The reaction taking place during the titrations is shown by the equation.
MnO4

(aq) + 5Fe2+(aq) + 8H+
(aq) → Mn2+(aq) + 5Fe3+(aq) + 4H2O(l)
Calculate the mass of Fe2+ ions in 100cm3
of the reduced solution, produced in step 6, by
using the appropriate average titre from (d)(i).
Give your answer to three significant figures.
[Ar
: Fe, 55.8] mass of Fe2+ ions = ………………………… g [2] 

Ans: M1:
n MnO4– (aq) = 43.5
× 0.02 / 1000 = 8.70
× 10–4
n Fe2+ (aq) = 8.70
× 10–4
× 5 = 4.35
× 10–3
M2:
mass of Fe 2+ (aq) = 4.35
× 10–3
× 55.8
×
100
25
= 0.971 g 

 

(iii) Calculate the mass of Fe2+ ions in the original 250.0cm3
Fe2+(aq)/Fe3+(aq) solution, using
the appropriate average titre from 2(d)(i).
mass of Fe2+ ions = ………………………… g [1]

Ans: n MnO4- (aq) = 17.1
× 0.02 / 1000 = 3.42
× 10–4
n Fe2+ (aq) = 3.42
× 10–4
× 5 = 1.71
× 10–3
mass of Fe 2+ (aq) = 1.71
× 10–3
× 55.8
×
250
25
= 0.954 g 

 

(iv) Calculate the percentage by mass of Fe3+ ions in the original 250.0cm3
Fe2+(aq)/Fe3+(aq)
solution.
percentage by mass of Fe3+ ions = ………………………… % [1]

Ans: % Fe3+ = ((2(d)(ii)
×
250
100 ) – 2(d)(iii))/(2(d)(ii)
×
250
100 ))
× 100%
OR
(2(d)(ii)
× 2.5 – 2(d)(iii)) / (2(d)(ii)
× 2.5)
× 100% 

 

(v) State what change could be made to the procedure to enable titration 3 to be carried out
in set B.

Ans: reduce / use (in step 6) more than 100 cm3 of solution (Fe2+ and Fe3+)

ACCOUNTING 9706

1 In financial statements, inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value in the  statement of financial position. 

Which accounting concept is being applied? 

A duality 

B historic cost 

C matching 

D prudence 

2 Which statements describe advantages of a computerised accounting system? 1 It allows for large amounts of data to be stored. 

2 Mistakes in entering data are never made. 

3 The system can be installed with minimum cost. 

4 The trial balance always balances. 

A 1 and 2 

B 1 and 4 

C 2 and 3 

D 2 and 4 

3 What would be treated as part of the capital expenditure of the purchase of a building? 1 cost of purchase 

2 installation of air conditioning needed for the machinery in the building 

3 insurance of the building  

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 1 only D 2 and 3 only

© UCLES 2020 9706/01/SP/23 

4 The table shows parts of the statements of financial position of a business. 

 

2020  

 $

2019  

 $

non-current assets (at cost) less accumulated depreciation net book value 

245000 

90000 

190000 

75000

155000 

115000



Other information for the financial year 2020 is as follows: 

 

$

depreciation charged 

new non-current assets purchased (at cost) loss on sale of non-current assets 

40000 

105000 

10000



Which amount was received from the sale of the non-current assets? 

A $15000 B $25000 C $35000 D $50000 

5 A business has a financial year end of 31 December. It purchased a motor vehicle on 1 January  2017 for $24000. The estimated useful life of the motor vehicle was four years. The estimated  residual value at the end of four years was $8000. 

The business depreciates motor vehicles at 25% per year using the reducing balance method. No  depreciation is charged in the year of disposal. 

The motor vehicle was sold on 31 July 2020 for $12000.  

What was the profit on the sale of the motor vehicle? 

A $1875 B $4000 C $5250 D $8000 

© UCLES 2020 9706/01/SP/23 [Turn over 

6 A business’s suspense account appears as follows. 

 

$

 

$

salaries 

150 

opening balance sales 

100 

50

150 

150



Which statements are correct? 

1 The salaries account had been overcast by $150. 

2 The sales account had been overcast by $50. 

3 Total debits had been $100 less than total credits in the trial balance. 

A 1 and 2 B 1 only C 2 and 3 D 3 only 

7 In statement of profit or loss carriage outwards of $5000 has been treated as carriage inwards. Carriage inwards of $3000 has been treated as carriage outwards.  

What effect do these errors have on the profit? 

 

gross profit 

profit for the year

overstated by $2000 overstated by $8000 understated by $2000 understated by $8000 

understated by $2000 no effect 

no effect 

overstated by $8000



8 A bank statement shows a credit balance of $1500. 

A payment of $500 and a receipt of $1250 were included in the cash book but have not yet  appeared on the bank statement. 

Bank interest payable of $1100 had been correctly recorded in the cash book but due to a bank  error had been recorded in the bank statement as $1000. 

What is the cash book balance? 

A $650 B $850 C $2150 D $3350

© UCLES 2020 9706/01/SP/23 

9 In which book of prime entry is the contra between the sales ledger control account and the  purchases ledger control account recorded? 

A cash book 

B general journal 

C purchases journal 

D sales journal 

10 A book-keeper reconciles the control accounts with the sales and purchases ledgers. Which errors are identified in this way? 

1 A figure was transposed when copied from a book of prime entry to a personal account. 2 An incorrect amount was entered in a book of prime entry. 

3 A total in a book of prime entry was incorrect. 

4 A transaction was omitted from a book of prime entry. 

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1, 2 and 4 C 1 and 3 only D 2 and 4 only 

11 The draft profit for the year for a sole trader was $108 000 before the following were taken into  account. 

1 An accrual of $600 for repairs had been treated as a prepayment. 

2 Depreciation of non-current assets had been undercharged by $2000.  

3 The allowance brought forward for irrecoverable debts was $1850. The allowance to carry  forward should be $2250. 

What was the correct profit for the year? 

A $104400 B $105200 C $109000 D $111600 

12 A company received interest of $8800 during the financial year. Interest of $700 was due to be  received at the beginning of the year and $850 at the end of the year. 

Which entry appeared in the interest received account to make the transfer to the statement of  profit or loss? 

A $8650 credit B $8650 debit C $8950 credit D $8950 debit 

© UCLES 2020 9706/01/SP/23 [Turn over 

13 Katrina started a business on 1 January 2020. For the year ended 31 December 2020, the  following information is available. 

 

$

drawings 

53500

profit for the year 

62700

revenue 

1500000

expenses 

875000



What was the cost of sales for the year? 

A $562300 B $571500 C $678000 D $687700  

14 What are advantages to a sole trader of forming a partnership? 

1 Losses can be shared by all partners. 

2 More capital may be available to the business. 

3 Profits will be greater than those of a sole trader. 

4 There may be disagreements between partners. 

A 1 and 2 

B 1 and 3 

C 2 and 3 

D 3 and 4 

15 Smith and Jones are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio 3 : 2 respectively. Profit for the year was $152000. 

Smith was charged interest on drawings of $1650. Jones had a partnership salary of $40000. What was Smith’s share of the residual profit? 

A $66210 B $68190 C $114210 D $116190 

16 There are three partners in a partnership. 

The total of their current accounts at the start of the year was $18000 and at the end of the year is  $32000. 

Total drawings for the year amount to $22000 and total of partners’ salaries are $13000.  What is the profit for the year? 

A $5000 B $14000 C $23000 D $36000

© UCLES 2020 9706/01/SP/23 

17 Which statement about rights issues is correct? 

A These shares can be offered to anyone. 

B These shares can only be offered to existing shareholders. 

C These shares cannot be sold at a premium. 

D These shares cannot be sold at less than the market price. 

18 A company’s profit from operations has increased by 10% in a year, whilst its gross profit has only  increased by 5%. 

Which factors could explain this? 

1 a decrease in distribution costs  

2 a decrease in finance costs 

3 an increase in rent received 

4 an increase in selling prices 

A 1 and 2 B 1 and 3 C 2 and 4 D 3 and 4  

19 A trial balance on 31 December 2020 showed the following information: 

 $ 

ordinary share capital ($1 shares) 500000 

retained earnings 300000 

On 1 January 2021 the directors created a general reserve of $70000. At the same time 200000  ordinary shares were issued for $300000. 

By which amount did the total reserves increase on 1 January 2021? 

A $100000 B $170000 C $300000 D $370000 

20 The following information is given in the financial statements of a limited company: 

 

$

ordinary shares 

general reserve 

retained earnings 8% debentures 

1200000 

120000 

710000 

400000



What is the value of total equity? 

A $1910000 B $2030000 C $2310000 D $2430000

© UCLES 2020 9706/01/SP/23 [Turn over 

21 The table shows year-end information for a company. 

statement of profit or loss 

statement of financial position

 

$

 

$

profit from operations 

14000 

5% debenture 2030 

30000

finance costs 

(1500) 

ordinary share capital 

70000

loss on disposal of non-current asset 

(2500) 

share premium account 

15000

profit for the year 

10000 

retained earnings 

35000



What is the return on capital employed (ROCE)? 

A 6.7% B 8.3% C 9.3% D 11.7% 

22 A company provided the following information: 

 

$

revenue for the year 

year-end non-current assets at cost year-end accumulated depreciation 

390000 

260000 

65000



What was the non-current asset turnover? 

A 0.5 times B 0.67 times C 1.5 times D 2 times 

23 A garage owner paid the following costs: 

1 garage equipment repairs  

2 mechanics’ wages 

3 rent paid for garage premises 

4 spare parts used to repair vehicles 

Which of these are direct costs? 

A 1, 2, 3 and 4 

B 1, 2 and 3 only 

C 1 and 3 only 

D 2 and 4 only

© UCLES 2020 9706/01/SP/23 

24 A business provided the following information: 

month 

number of  

labour hours

total overheads   $

February March 

64000 

76000 

918000 

1062000



What was the monthly fixed overhead cost? 

A $144000 B $150000 C $768000 D $912000 

25 What is the reason for calculating an overhead absorption rate in a manufacturing business? 

A to control overhead expenditure 

B to determine whether or not a supplier is overcharging  

C to enable overheads to be apportioned to cost centres 

D to establish costs per unit of product 

26 Budgeted overhead expenditure was $180000 and budgeted labour hours were 12000. Actual  overheads amounted to $196000 and actual labour hours were 12200. 

What was the under-absorption or over-absorption of overheads? 

A $3000 over  

B $3000 under  

C $13000 over 

D $13000 under 

27 Why might a business use marginal costing? 

1 to calculate break-even units 

2 to decide on the most profitable use of limited resources 

3 to decide whether to make a product or buy it 

A 1, 2 and 3 B 1 and 2 only C 2 only D 3 only

© UCLES 2020 9706/01/SP/23 [Turn over 

10 

28 How is margin of safety calculated? 

A actual sales minus break-even sales  

B actual sales minus expected sales  

C actual sales minus cost of sales 

D expected sales minus cost of sales 

29 A business manufactures and sells a single product. The following information is available: 

 

this year  

$

estimated  next year  $

selling price per unit 

25 

25

variable cost per unit 

15 

17

total fixed costs 

80000 

84000



The profit for this year is $20000. 

How many units must be sold to achieve the same profit next year? 

A 10000 B 10500 C 12500 D 13000 

30 A company wants to sell 50000 units and achieve a profit of $600000.  

It has variable costs of $60 per unit and total fixed overheads of $400000.  

Which selling price per unit does the company need to charge? 

A $64 B $68 C $72 D $80 

Ans:

Question 

Answer 

Marks 

1

10

C

1

11

A

1

12

D

1

13

A

1

14

A

1

15

B

1

16

D

1

17

B

1

18

B

1

19

A

1

20

B

1

21

C

1

22

D

1

23

D

1

24

B

1

25

D

1

26

D

1

27

A

1

28

A

1

29

D

1

30

D

1

1 Hamid and Jamila have been in partnership for several years and do not have a partnership  agreement. They do not maintain full accounting records.  

(a) (i) State two disadvantages to Hamid and Jamila of trading as a partnership rather than as  sole traders. [2] 

Ans:  State two disadvantages to Hamid and Jamila of trading as a partnership rather than as sole traders.
Max 2
Having to share profits (1)
Possible disagreements between partners (1)
Possible delays in decision making (1)
Accept other valid responses

ii) State three items other than the profit and loss sharing ratio which may be included in a  partnership agreement.  

Ans: State three items other than the profit and loss sharing ratio which may be included in a partnership agreement.
Max 3
The amount of capital each partner has to introduce (1)
Whether any interest on capital should be paid (1)
The rate at which any interest on capital is given (1)
Duties of each partner (1)
Partners’ salaries (1)
Interest on drawings (1)
Interest on partners’ loans (1)
Accept other valid responses

Additional information 

The partners have provided the following information for the year ended 31 December 2020. 

 At 31 December At 1 January   2020 2020  $ $  Administrative expenses owing – 472  Administrative expenses prepaid 291 –     Furniture and fittings at carrying value  26 580  24 720     Inventory  9 322  7 430  Insurance prepaid – 390     Trade receivables  12 930  14 380 

During the year ended 31 December 2020: 

 $ 

 Irrecoverable debt written off 336 

    Receipts from trade receivables  164 650 

    Returns inwards  1 084 

All sales are made on credit. 

 

(b) Calculate the revenue for the year ended 31 December 2020.  

Ans: Calculate the revenue for the year ended 31 December 2020.
$
Receipts 164 650
Irrecoverable debt 336 (1)
Returns inwards 1 084 (1)
Closing trade receivables 12 930
                  179 000
Less opening trade receivables 14 380
Revenue 164 620 (1)OF
No specific layout is required

 

Additional information 

The following information is also available for the year ended 31 December 2020. 

 $ 

    Administrative expenses paid  8 228 

    Insurance paid  1 090 

    Purchase of additional furniture and fittings  4 500 

    Purchases of goods for resale  112 152 

    Receipts from the disposal of furniture and fittings  575 

    Rent of business premises  14 500 

    Staff wages 10 230 

All goods are sold with a mark-up of 50%. 

During the year Hamid took goods for his own use but no record was made of their value. Furniture and fittings with a carrying value of $800 were disposed of during the year. (c) Prepare the partnership statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 2020. 

Hamid and Jamila 

 Statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 2020  $ $ 

Ans: 

Prepare the partnership statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 2020.
Each mark is for an amount that is clearly identified with a label
Labels in bold must be correctly worded as shown
Hamid and Jamila
Statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 2020
$ $
Revenue 164 620
Less returns inwards (1 084) (1)
163 536
Opening inventory 7 430 }*
Purchases 112 152
Goods for own use (balancing figure) (1 236) (1)OF
118 346
Closing inventory (9 322) }* (1)*
Cost of sales (109 024) (1)OF
Gross profit (W1) 54 512 (1)OF
Administrative expenses (W2) 7 465 (2)
Insurance (W3) 1 480 (1)
Irrecoverable debt 336 (1)
Loss on disposal of fittings (W4) 225 (1)
Rent of business premises 14 500
Staff wages 10 230
Depreciation of furniture and fittings (W5) 1 840 (3)
(36 076)
Profit for the year 18 436 (1)OF
W1 Gross profit must be one third of own figure net sales revenue and labelled (1)

Additional information 

Hamid and Jamila have been advised that their business could be improved if they were to keep  full accounting records. They are considering two options. 

  Option 1: To employ a part-time book-keeper at a salary of $5000 per year. 

Option 2: To purchase a new computerised accounting package to maintain all the financial  records. This will cost $12 000 and will be written off over 5 years. Hamid has said he will loan $12 000 to the business, but will require interest of 5% per year on the loan. 

W2 Administrative expenses
$
Opening balance owing (472) (1)
Payments 8 228
Closing balance prepaid  (291) (1)
7 465
W3 Insurance: paid $1090 + opening prepayment $390 = $1480
W4 Loss on disposal: valuation $800 – receipts $575 = $225
W5 Depreciation of furniture and fittings
$
Opening carrying value 24 720
Disposal (800) (1)
Additions 4 500 (1)
Closing carrying value (26 580)
Depreciation 1 840 (1)OF

(d) (i) Calculate Jamila’s share of profit or loss for both Option 1 and Option 2. Option 1

Ans: Calculate Jamila’s share of profit or loss for both Option 1 and Option 2.
Change in profits
$
Option 1 $(18 436 – 5000 ) / 2 6718 (1)OF
Option 2 $([18 436 – 600] – 2400) (1) / 2 7718 (1)OF 

 (ii) Advise the partners which option they should choose. Justify your answer.

Ans: Advise the partners which option they should choose. Justify your answer.
Max 3 marks for Option 1
Max 3 marks for Option 2
Max 4 marks in total for options 1 and 2
Decision (1)
Option 1 (max 3)
Will result in lower share of profits (1)
Need to find an employee who can be trusted (1)
The book-keeper may be able to help out in other areas and cut down on the partners’ workload (1)
Option 2 (max 3)
Cost of purchase is a one-off cost (1)
Will be able to handle large amounts of data (1)
Training may be required (1)
The partners may still have to employ another member of staff which will reduce profits further (1)
Decision: either option supported by arguments (1) e.g. Option 2 because computerisation is a one-off cost
Accept other valid responses

 

2 Sergio is a sole trader. His book-keeper prepares regular bank reconciliation statements. (a) State two benefits of preparing regular bank reconciliation statements

Ans: State two benefits of preparing regular bank reconciliation statements.
Max 2
Errors in the cash book will be discovered earlier and can be corrected (1)
Errors made by the bank will be discovered earlier and can be communicated to them (1)
Dishonoured cheques will be identified earlier and steps taken to recover the payments due from receivables (1)
Amounts missing from the cash book would be identified earlier and could be posted to the accounts (1)
There would be a lower risk of the business exceeding its overdraft limit (1)
Accept other valid responses

Additional information 

Sergio is preparing his financial statements to 31 May 2020.  

His bank statement shows the following for the first week of June 2020: 

Date 

Details 

Debit 

Credit 

Balance

 

2020

 

$

$

$

 

31 May 

Balance 

  

12 350 

Debit

1 June 

Cash and cheques banked 

 

1 211 

11 139 

Debit

2 June 

Cheque 1681 

527 

 

11 666 

Debit

 

Cheque 1682 

361 

 

12 027 

Debit

 

Cash and cheques banked 

 

2 170 

9 857 

Debit

3 June 

Cheque 1683 

1 260 

 

11 117 

Debit

4 June 

Standing order adjustment 

 

225 

10 892 

Debit

6 June 

BACS Sofia 

536 

 

11 428 

Debit

7 June 

Balance 

  

11 428 

Debit

The following information is also available. 

1 The deposits on 1 June and 2 June both relate to amounts received and recorded by Sergio  in his cash book for the month of May. 

2  The last cheque that Sergio issued in May 2020 was number 1683. 

3 The adjustment on 4 June 2020 related to a standing order debited by the bank in error on  27 May 2020. 

4  On 5 June 2020 Sergio received a letter from the bank that had been delayed in the post. The letter stated that on 29 May 2020: 

 bank charges of $90 and bank interest of $120 had been debited to his account     an amount of $360 had been received electronically from Alvaro, a credit customer.

 

(b) Prepare Sergio’s bank reconciliation statement at 31 May 2020 to show the balance in the  cash book before it is updated. 

Ans: Prepare Sergio’s bank reconciliation statement at 31 May 2020 to show the balance in the cash book before it is
updated.
Each mark is for an amount that is clearly identified with a label
Bank reconciliation statement
$ $
Balance per bank statement (12 350) (1)
Correction of bank error  225 (1)
Amended bank statement balance (12 125)
Unpresented cheques:
1681 527
1682 361
1683 1 260 (2 148) (1)
(14 273)
Outstanding bankings
1 April 1 211
2 April 2 170 3 381 (1)
(10 892)
Bank charges 90
Bank interest  120 210 (1)
Receipt from Alvaro  (360) (1)
Balance per cash book (11 042) (1)OF

Additional information 

Sergio’s bank manager has asked Sergio to repay the overdraft within the next three months.  Sergio has identified two possible options. 

  Option 1: Miguel, a close friend, would provide Sergio with a loan of $10 000 repayable in five annual instalments of $2500. 

  Option 2: Sergio could take a seven-year bank loan from another bank for $16 000. This bank would require annual interest of $1000 and security for the loan. 

 

(c) Explain the benefits and drawbacks to Sergio of each option.  

Ans: Explain the benefits and drawbacks to Sergio of each option.
Max 2 marks for benefits for each option
Max 2 mark for drawbacks for each option
Overall max 3 for each option
Option 1 (max 3)
Benefits (max 2)
No security required (1)
Sergio has less pressure (1)
100% of any future profits will go to Sergio (1)
Drawbacks (max 2)
The loan will need to be repaid within a relatively short period of time (1)
The business might not do well enough to generate sufficient cash to pay it (1)
The loan would not cover repayment of the overdraft (1)
Option 2 (max 3)
Benefits (max 2)
Will clear overdraft and provide additional working capital (1)
The arrangement is more formal (1)
Sergio has a longer time to repay the loan (1)
Drawbacks (max 2)
The loan will cost Sergio more interest than borrowing from Miguel (1)
Sergio now has more pressure to earn profits, probably higher than at present (1)
Sergio could lose his business if he fails to repay as bank will take his assets (1)

 

3 The directors of AB plc have decided to make a rights issue and a bonus issue of ordinary shares.  (a) Identify two advantages to the company of: 

 (i) a rights issue of ordinary shares 

Ans: Identify two advantages to the company of a rights issue of ordinary shares.
Max 2
The company will gain additional cash from the rights issue (1)
The issue will be cheaper than an issue by prospectus (1)
The shares will be offered to existing shareholders and these investors will be more in favour of the company than finding new
investors (1)
Does not dilute ownership (1)
Accept other valid responses

 

 (ii) a bonus issue of ordinary shares. 

Ans: Identify two advantages to the company of a bonus issue of ordinary shares.
Max 2
The bonus issue will keep existing shareholders satisfied (1) especially if there is no cash available for dividends (1)
It will make use of capital reserves (1)
Does not dilute ownership (1)
Accept other valid responses 

Additional information 

The following information is available for AB plc at 1 January 2020. 

  Equity    $ 

    Ordinary share capital ($0.50 shares)  120 000 

    Share premium  25 000 

    Retained earnings  43 000 

AB plc has adopted the revaluation model for measuring the value of its non-current assets. During the year ended 31 December 2020 the following took place: 

1 July The directors made a rights issue of one ordinary share for every 6 held at a  premium of $0.05 per share. The issue was fully subscribed. 

1 August  The directors made a bonus issue of 1 ordinary share for every 5 held on that date. They wished to keep the reserves in their most flexible form. 

30 September  The directors paid an interim dividend of $0.08 per share on all shares in issue at that date. 

31 December  Land which had cost $120 000 is now only worth $100 000. This has not been adjusted in the books of account. 

The company made a profit for the year ended 31 December 2020 of $18 000.

 

(b) Prepare the ledger accounts to record these transactions. 

Ordinary share capital account 

Ans: Prepare the ledger accounts to record these transactions.
1 mark for all correct dates and correctly worded labels
Ordinary share capital account
2020 $ 2020 $
January 1 Balance b/d 120 000
July 1 Bank 20 000 (1)
August 1 Share premium 27 000 (1)
December 31 Balance c/d 168 000 Retained earnings 1 000 (1)
168 000 168 000
2021
January 1 Balance b/d 168 000 (1)OF
Share premium account
2020 $ 2020 $
August 1 Ordinary share capital 27 000 (1) January 1 Balance b/d 25 000
July 1 Bank 2 000 (1)
27 000 27 000 

 

Retained earnings account
2020 $ 2020 $
August 1 Ordinary share capital 1 000 (1) January 1 Balance b/d 43 000
September 30 Dividend 26 880  (1) December 31 Statement of profit or loss 18 000
December 31 Land 20 000 (1)OF
Balance c/d 13 120 61 000
61 000 61 000
2021
January 1 Balance b/d 13 120 (1)OF

 

4 Z Limited is a manufacturing company. It operates two production departments and two service  departments. The costs are allocated to each department as follows: 

Production departments Service departments 

Machining Finishing Stores Canteen 

 $ $ $ $ 

Indirect labour 253 000 340 100 52 000 78 000 Other indirect overhead costs 205 000 225 000 80 000 92 000 Total indirect costs 458 000 565 100 132 000 170 000 

The costs of the service departments are to be apportioned to the other departments as follows: 

Canteen in proportion to the number of employees  

  Stores in proportion to the number of stores requisitions 

The following information is available: 

 Machining Finishing Stores Canteen Number of employees  5  9  3  1 Direct labour hours  15 000  40 000  

Machine hours  45 000  25 000  

Number of stores requisitions  6 300  7 200  

 

(a) Apportion the service department costs by completing the table. 

Ans: Apportion the service department costs by completing the table.
Machining Finishing Stores Canteen
$ $ $ $
Total indirect costs 458 000 565 100 132 000 170 000
Reapportionment of canteen costs 50 000 (1) 90 000 (1) 30 000 (170 000)
508 000 655 100 162 000 0
Reapportionment of stores 75 600 (1)OF 86 400 (1)OF (162 000)
Total apportioned costs 583 600 (1)OF 741 500 (1)OF

 

(b) Calculate, to two decimal places, a suitable overhead absorption rate for each of the production departments.

Ans: Calculate, to two decimal places, a suitable overhead absorption rate for each of the production departments.
Machining Finishing
$ $
583 600 741 500
/ 45 000 / 40 000
Overhead absorption rate $12.97 (1)OF $18.54 (1)OF
per machine hour (1) per labour hour (1)

Additional information 

Z Limited has been approached by a customer to quote for one of their products. This will require the following: 

Direct materials  20 kilos at $5 per kilo 

Direct labour  8 hours at $9 per hour 

Direct labour hours and machine hours required in each department will be: 

 Machining Finishing 

Direct labour  3 hours  5 hours 

Machine time 2 hours 20 minutes 

It is the company’s policy to achieve a gross margin of 40% on all its products.

 

(c) Calculate the total price to quote to the customer. 

Calculate the total price to quote to the customer.
$
Direct materials (20 kilos at $5 per kilo) 100.00 (1)
Direct labour (8 hours at $9 per hour) 72.00 (1)
Machining department overhead (2 × $12.97) 25.94 (1)OF
Finishing department overhead (5 × $18.54) 92.70 (1)OF
290.64
Margin 193.76 (1)OF
Price to quote 484.40 (1)OF

 

Additional information 

The customer has said they will buy the goods from Z Limited, but at a price which will earn Z Limited a gross margin of 25%. 

(d) Advise the directors whether or not they should accept the offer. Justify your answer.

Advise the directors whether or not they should accept the offer. Justify your answer.
Max 2 marks for reasons for accepting
Max 2 marks for reasons for rejecting
1 mark for decision
Accepting (max 2)
Will ensure that workers are employed (1)
Will ensure the factory keeps working (1)
A gross margin of 25% will still cover the variable costs and earn some contribution (1)
Factory may gain extra work as a result of satisfying this customer (1)
Rejecting (max 2)
It may lead to this customer looking for a lower margin/purchase price on all future orders (1)
Other customers may learn of the reduction in price and all ask for their prices to be reduced (1)
Might stop the company taking on more profitable orders if resources are being taken up with this (1)
Decision: accept or reject, supported by reasoning (1) e.g. accept because some contribution is still earned
Accept other valid responses

 

Additional information 

Z Limited operates a second factory. It uses both direct labour hours and machine hours to absorb  its factory overheads. The cost accountant has suggested that a single factory-wide overhead  absorption rate should be used instead. 

(e) Advise the directors whether or not they should make this change. Justify your answer.

Ans: Advise the directors whether or not they should make this change. Justify your answer.
Max 2 marks for changing
Max 2 marks against changing
1 mark for decision supported by a comment
For changing (Max 2 marks)
Easier to calculate (1)
No need to use arbitrary apportionment rates to charge factory-wide overheads to departments (1)
Cheaper to calculate (1)
Against making change (Max 2 marks)
Different products may use more direct labour hours than machine hours (1)
Less accurate (1)
May lead to uncompetitive selling prices being charged (1)
Different products may spend different time in each department (1)
Decision for or against, supported by reasoning (1) e.g. factory should make change because it is easier to calculate 

 

(f) Discuss the impact of over-absorption of overheads on the profits of a manufacturing  business.

Discuss the impact of over-absorption of overheads on the profits of a manufacturing business.
Max 4 marks
Will mean that too much overhead is charged to the product (1)
This may lead to a higher price being charged to customers (1) leading to increased profit (1)
Over absorption could lead to a higher selling price which could lead to lower demand (1) and lower profits (1)

 

SPECIMEN INSERT

Source A for Question 1
The finance director of Y Limited has provided the following statements of financial position for the
years ended 31 December 2020 (draft) and 2019:
Y Limited
Statements of financial position
2020 (draft) 2019
$000 $000
Assets
Non-current assets
Premises 248 111
Plant and machinery 34 52
282 163
Current assets
Inventory 48 36
Trade receivables 46 49
Cash and cash equivalents 40 14
134 99
000 000
Total assets 416 262
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Ordinary share capital ($1 shares) 150 100
Share premium 20 –
Revaluation reserve 100 –
Retained earnings 18 57
Total equity 288 157
Non-current liabilities
Bank loan 95 70
Current liabilities
Trade payables 33 25
Taxation – 10
33 35
Total liabilities 128 105
000 000
Total equity and liabilities 416 262

 

The following information for the year ended 31 December 2020 was also available:
1 The loss from operations for the year was $14 000.
2 Depreciation charged was:
$
Premises 2 000
Plant and machinery 11 000
3 Plant and equipment that had cost $12 000 was sold for $6000 during the year. Accumulated
depreciation at the date of disposal was $5000.
4 The premises were revalued upwards by $100 000 on 1 April.
5 Bank interest charged in the statement of profit or loss and paid during the year was $4000.
6 A final dividend of $0.12 per ordinary share was paid on 31 March to shareholders on the register
at 31 December 2019.
7 On 1 September the company made a rights issue of 1 new ordinary share for every 2 ordinary
shares held at a premium of $0.40. The rights issue was fully subscribed.
8 An interim dividend of $0.06 per ordinary share was paid on 30 November to shareholders on the
register at 31 October.
9 There was no provision for taxation for the year ended 31 December 2020

Source B for Question 2
Z plc had the following balances at 1 January 2020:
$
Ordinary share capital ($2 shares) 500 000
General reserve 40 000
Retained earnings 460 000
4% Debenture (repayable 2031) 400 000

Source C for Question 3
Amil and James are in partnership. Their statement of financial position on 1 January 2020 was as
follows:
$
Assets
Non-current assets
Land and buildings 40 000
Office equipment 16 000
56 000
Current assets
Inventory 10 000
Trade receivables 19 000
Cash at bank 6 000
35 000
Total assets 91 000
Capital and liabilities
Capital Accounts
Amil 43 000
James 25 000
68 000
Non-current liabilities
4% Loan from James 9 000
Current liabilities 14 000
Total liabilities 23 000
Total capital and liabilities 91 000

M Limited took over the business of the partnership of Amil and James on 1 January 2020.
The following information is also available:
1 The partners did not keep separate current accounts.
2 Amil and James shared profits and losses in the ratio 2 : 3 respectively.
3 The assets of Amil and James are to be valued at:
$
Land and buildings 50 000
Office equipment 14 000
Inventory 8 000
Trade receivables 16 000
4 Amil will take a computer valued at $2500.
5 M Limited will take over all the remaining assets and liabilities of the partnership with the exception
of James’s loan and the cash at bank.
6 The terms of the sale are:
• M Limited will issue a 6% debenture (2029) to cover the loan from James and to ensure his
annual interest income remains the same.
• The company will issue 50 000 ordinary shares of $1 each at a premium of $0.20 per share.
These are to be allocated to Amil and James in their profit sharing ratios.
• The balance of the sale proceeds will be $20 000 and will be paid into the partnerships’ bank
account.

 

1 Read Source A in the Insert.
(a) Prepare the statement of cash flows for Y Limited for the year ended 31 December 2020, in
accordance with IAS 7.

Prepare the statement of cash flows for Y Limited for the year ended 31 December 2020, in accordance with IAS 7.
Each mark is for an amount that is clearly identified with an appropriate label
Y Limited
Statement of cash flows for the year ended 31 December 2020
$000 $000
Operating activities
Profit / loss from operations (14) (1)
Depreciation – premises 2 }
– plant and machinery 11 } (1)
Loss on sale of plant and machinery 1 (1)
Increase in inventory (12) }
Decrease in trade receivables 3 } (1)
Increase in trade payables 8 (1)
Cash used in operations (1)
Interest paid (4) }
Taxation paid (10) } (1)
Net cash used in operating activities (15)
Investing activities
Proceeds of sales of plants and machinery 6 (1)
Purchase of premises (39) (1)
Net cash used in investing activities (33)
Financing activities
Proceeds of issue of ordinary shares 70 (1)
Proceeds of long term loans 25 (1)
Ordinary dividends paid (21) (1)
Net cash from financing activities 74
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 26 (1)OF
Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 2020 14 (1)
Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2020 40 (1

 

(b) State three circumstances under which the auditors will issue an unqualified audit report.

State three circumstances under which the auditors will issue an unqualified audit report.
Complies with international accounting standards (1)
The financial statements have been prepared without material errors or omissions (1)
Complies with all legal requirements (1)
Accept other valid responses

 

Additional information
Y Limited had received a letter in August 2020 from a customer, P Limited, stating that they are
taking legal action against Y Limited for a breach of contract. Y Limited’s lawyers have indicated
there is an 80% probability that Y Limited will lose the case and the estimated amount to settle the
case will be $36 000. This matter has not been taken into account in the draft financial statements
for the year ended 31 December 2020.
(c) Discuss how the matter should be treated in the financial statements for the year ended
31 December 2020. Justify your answer, making reference to the appropriate International
Accounting Standard.

Discuss how the matter should be treated in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2020. Justify
your answer, making reference to the appropriate International Accounting Standard.
The claim would fall under IAS 37 (1)
Any three from:
The claim is material in the context of Y Limited’s income statement (loss from operations) (1)
The company’s lawyers have confirmed that Y Limited has an 80% probability of losing the case therefore its obligation to pay
is probable. (1)
The sum $36 000 to be paid is a reliable estimate. (1)
Y Limited should make a provision of $36 000 as an expense in the statement of profit and loss and show the same amount
as current liabilities in the statement of financial position (1)

 

Additional information
Sarah is the accountant of Y Limited. She reports to the finance director. Her assistant accountant,
who was responsible for drafting month-end financial statements and reports, has resigned from
the company.
Sarah’s daughter, Jenna, has recently lost her job. Sarah suggests to the finance director that
Jenna should be recruited as the new assistant accountant.
Jenna studied A Level Accounting ten years ago and has since worked as an accounting clerk.
She has no other accounting qualifications.
The finance director has rejected Sarah’s proposal.


(d) Explain why the finance director rejected Sarah’s proposal to recruit Jenna.
Justify your answer with reference to the fundamental principles of the ethical framework for
accounting.

Explain why the finance director rejected Sarah’s proposal to recruit Jenna.
Justify your answer with reference to the fundamental principles of the ethical framework for accounting.
Accountants in business should have appropriate professional competence to undertake their tasks (1)
Jenna is unqualified and has limited accounting experience (1)
Employing your daughter, and having her report to you, would be a potential conflict of interest (1)
Sarah might be less objective in dealing with her performance or pay (1)

 

2 Read Source B in the Insert.
(a) State two reasons why a business may have non-current liabilities even though it also has
substantial retained earnings.

State two reasons why a business may have non-current liabilities even though it also has substantial retained
earnings.
Retained earnings are not the same as cash (1)
The business may have invested in other assets e.g. non-current assets or inventory (1)
Accept other valid responses

Additional information
The following information was also available for the year ended 31 December 2020.
1 During the year a long-term bank loan, $250 000, was taken. The interest charged on this
loan by the year end was $14 000.
2 An interim ordinary dividend of $0.06 per share was paid on all issued shares at 1 January
2020.
3 The taxation charge for the year was $10 000.
4 200 000 shares were issued at a premium of $0.75 per share.
5 The profit from operations was $105 000.
6 A transfer to general reserve, $25 000, was made.
7 A final dividend of $0.08 per share was proposed on all issued shares at 31 December 2020.

 

(b) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2020.
A total column is required.

Prepare the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2020.
A total column is required.
Z plc
Statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2020
Ordinary
share capital
Share
premium
General
reserve
Retained
earnings
Total
$000 $000 $000 $000 $000
At 1 January 2020 500 40 460 1000 (1) row
Ordinary interim dividend paid (15) (1) (15)
Issue of shares 400 (1) 150 (1) 550
Profit for the year 65 65 W1 (3)
Transfer to general reserve 25 } (25) }(1) –
At 31 December 2020 900 150 65 485 1600 (1)OF row
W1 105 000 – 16 000 (1) – (14 000 + 10 000) (1) = $65 000 (1)OF
Do not award OF mark if an extraneous item is present

 

(c) (i) Calculate, to two decimal places, the gearing ratio of Z plc at 31 December 2020.

Calculate, to two decimal places, the gearing ratio of Z plc at 31 December 2020.
$(400 000 + 250 000) (1) ÷ $(400 000 + 250 000 + 1 600 000) (1)OF × 100 = 28.89% (1)OF

 

(ii) Calculate the interest cover ratio of Z plc at 31 December 2020.

Calculate the interest cover ratio of Z plc at 31 December 2020.
$105 000 ÷ $(16 000 + 14 000) 1(OF) = 3.5 times (1)OF

 

Additional information
The business had issued the shares and taken out the bank loan in order to finance an extension
to the factory.
At the Annual General Meeting one shareholder stated that, rather than issuing shares, the
company should have financed the extension entirely by taking out long-term bank loans.


(d) (i) Calculate, to two decimal places, the revised gearing ratio if the shareholder’s proposal
had been adopted.

Calculate, to two decimal places, the revised gearing ratio if the shareholder’s proposal had been adopted.
$(650 000 + 550 000) (1)OF ÷ $2 250 000 × 100 = 53.33% (1)OF

 

(ii) Advise the directors whether or not they should agree with the shareholder. Justify your
answer.

Advise the directors whether or not they should agree with the shareholder. Justify your answer.
Max 2 marks for disagree comments
Max 2 marks for agree comments
1 mark for decision supported with comment
Disagree (max 2)
Gearing has increased / gone from low to high making the company more risky (1)
The increase in risk might have led to a higher rate of interest on the loans (1)
The interest cover will deteriorate and may threaten the payment of dividends in the future (1)
Loan interest has to be paid whether a profit is made or not so the company has less flexibility (1)
The company needs to generate enough cashflow to repay the loans so may find itself with cashflow problems (1)
Agree (max 2)
The share issue will have led to a dilution of control (1)
Issuing the shares may result in a lower dividend per share in the future (1)
The factory extension can be provided as security for the loans so a share issue wasn’t necessary (1)
1 mark for supported decision e.g. they should agree with the shareholder because although the loan interest has to be paid,
there is no requirement to pay a dividend (1)
Accept other valid responses

 

(e) State two factors a bank might consider when a business applies for a loan.

State two factors a bank might consider when a business applies for a loan.
Any two for 1 mark each:
The use to which the money will be put (1)
The business’s ability to pay interest / repay the principal (1)
The profitability of the business (1)
The state of the cash flow of the business (1)
The availability of assets on which the loan could be secured (1)
Accept other valid responses

 

3 Read Source C in the Insert.
(a) Explain the difference between inherent goodwill and purchased goodwill.

Explain the difference between inherent goodwill and purchased goodwill.
Max 2 for inherent goodwill
Max 2 for purchased goodwill
Inherent goodwill (max 2)
Is gained by the efforts of the business (1) and is not included in the financial statements (1)
Purchased goodwill (max 2)
Is the excess of purchase consideration over the fair value of the identifiable net assets on the acquisition of a business (1)
It is included in the financial statements as intangible non-current assets (1)
Accept other valid responses

 

(b) Calculate the amount of the debenture to be issued to James.

Calculate the amount of the debenture to be issued to James.
$9000 × 4% = $360 (1) ÷ 0.06 = $6000 (1)OF

 

(c) Prepare the journal entry in M Limited’s books to record the purchase of the partnership.
A narrative is not required.

Prepare the journal entry in M Limited’s books to record the purchase of the partnership. A narrative is not required.
Debit Credit
$ $
Land and buildings 50 000 }*
Office equipment 11 500 (1) W1
Inventory 8 000 }*
Trade receivables 16 000 }* (1) for 3 items
Goodwill 14 500 (1)OF
Current liabilities 14 000 (1)
Debenture 6 000 (1)OF
Bank 20 000
Ordinary share capital 50 000 }
Share premium 10 000 } (1)
W1 14 000 – 2500 = 11 500

 

(d) Prepare the partners’ capital accounts to show the closure of the partnership.

Prepare the partners’ capital accounts to show the closure of the partnership.
Capital accounts
2020 Amil
$
James
$
2020 Amil
$
James
$
January 1 M Limited –
ordinary shares
24 000 } 36 000 } (1) January 1 Balance b/d 43 000 25 000
Office equipment
– computer
2 500 (1) Profit on
realisation
7 000 10 500 (3) W1
M Limited – 6%
Debenture
6 000 Loan 9 000
Bank 23 500 } 2 500  } (1)OF
50 000 44 500 50 000 44 500
W1
Net assets purchased 56 000 + 10 000 + 19 000 = 85 000 – 14 000 – 2500 = 68 500 (1)
Profit on realisation 86 000 – 68 500 = 17 500 (1)OF
17 500 × 40% = 7000 Amil }
17 500 × 60% = 10 500 James } (1)OF

 

(e) Prepare the partnership bank account recording the closure of the partnership.

Prepare the partnership bank account recording the closure of the partnership.
Bank account
2020 $ 2020 $
January 1 Balance b/d 6 000 January 1 Capital
– Amil 23 500 } OF
M Limited 20 000 (1) – James 2 500 } (1)OF
26 000
26 000
26 000
26 000

 

(f) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the decision of the directors of M Limited to
purchase the partnership.

Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the decision of the directors of M Limited to purchase the partnership.
Max 3 for advantages
Max 3 for disadvantages
Max 5 in total
Advantages (max 3)
They have now eliminated a rival (1) and have gained their list of customers to widen their customer base (1) which may lead
to greater sales revenue and therefore profit (1)
They will gain synergy/economies of scale (1)
Disadvantages (max 3)
Old customers of the partnership may not go to new business (1)
There is a dilution of ownership because new shares have been issued (1)
The directors may take time to develop the business after adding the new partnership (1)
Accept other valid responses

 

SPECIMEN INSERT  

Source A for Question 1
W Limited uses a budgetary control system. To prepare the budget for the month of May, the directors
of W Limited estimated a production of 1200 units and fixed overheads of $30 000.
The following budgeted data is available for the production of one unit:
Direct materials 2 kilos at $12 per kilo
Direct labour 4 hours at $15 per hour
Fixed overheads to be charged to products on the basis of direct labour hours
The actual number of units produced and sold in May was 1120.
The actual and budgeted unit selling price was $135

Source B for Question 2
Z Limited receives an order from an existing customer to manufacture a new product for a period of
four years. To satisfy this order, the directors of Z Limited have to:
1 Purchase a machine from overseas with an expected cost of $300 000. The machine has a useful
life of 4 years with no residual value.
2 Hire a specialised engineer.
3 Purchase direct materials from a new supplier.
The estimates relating to the operation of this order are:
Cash inflow Cash outflow
Year $ $
1 200 000 140 000
2 230 000 130 000
3 240 000 110 000
4 210 000 100 000
The cost of capital is 10%. The relevant discount factors are:
10% 12%
0.909 0.893
0.826 0.797
0.751 0.712
0.683 0.636

 

1 Read Source A in the Insert.
(a) State three advantages of using a budgetary control system.

State three advantages of using a budgetary control system.
1 mark each for any three advantages (max 3):
Coordinating among departments for allocation of resources (1)
Setting target for each department to achieve (1)
Motivating managers/employees towards objectives (1)
Serving as a benchmark to control the use of resources (1)
Facilitating variance analysis (1)
Help making decision, for example, pricing (1)
Accept other valid responses

 

(b) Prepare a statement to show the total flexible budgeted profit.

Prepare a statement to show the total flexible budgeted profit.
$
Sales 1120 × $135 151 200
Direct materials (26 880) (1)
Direct labour (67 200) (1)
Fixed overheads W1 (28 000) (1)
Flexible budgeted profit 29 120 (1)OF
W1
$30 000/(1200 × 4) = $6.25 per labour hour
$6.25 × (1120 × 4) = $28 000

 

Additional information
Actual costs incurred for May were as follows:
$
Direct materials 27 300 2184 kilos used
Direct labour 67 466 4424 labour hours used
Fixed overheads 29 500
Total costs 124 266

(c) Calculate the following variances:
(i) direct labour rate

Calculate the direct labour rate variance.
(4424 × $15) – $67 466 = $1106 (1) A (1)

 

(ii) direct labour efficiency

Calculate the direct labour efficiency variance.
(1120 × 4 – 4424) × $15 = $840 (1) F (1)

 

(iii) fixed overheads expenditure

Calculate the fixed overheads expenditure variance.
$30 000 – $29 500 = $500 (1) F (1)

 

(iv) fixed overheads volume.

Calculate the fixed overheads volume variance.
(4800 – 1120 × 4) × $6.25 = $2000 (1) A (1)

 

Additional information
The directors have identified that there was an adverse total direct materials variance of $420.
(d) Prepare a statement to reconcile the flexible budgeted profit from (b) with the actual profit.

Prepare a statement to reconcile the flexible budgeted profit from (b) with the actual profit.
Each mark is for an amount that is clearly identified
$
Flexible budgeted profit 29 120
Total direct materials variance (420) (1)
Direct labour rate variance 1106A
Direct labour efficiency variance 840F (266) } (see Note 1)
Overheads expenditure variance 500F
Overheads volume variance 2000A (1 500) } (1)OF (see Note 1)
26 934
Actual profit ($151 200 – $124 266) 26 934 (1)
Note 1: Individual variances will be acceptable

 

Additional information
W Limited received orders for goods to be supplied in June from three customers only.
Customers A B C
Units ordered 300 700 400
Unit selling price $135 $130 $132
The budgeted data for May for the production of one unit remains valid. However, W Limited has
to pay an overtime premium of 75% to workers for production in excess of 1200 units in a month.
W Limited is considering two options only.
Option 1 Accept the orders of A, B and C.
Option 2 Accept the orders of A and B only.

 

(e) Advise the directors which option they should choose.
Justify your answer by:
• showing appropriate calculations (ignoring fixed overheads)
• making reference to non-financial factors.

Advise the directors which option they should choose.
Justify your answer by:
• showing appropriate calculations (ignoring fixed overheads)
• making reference to non-financial factors.
Option 1 Option 2
$ $
Sales 184 300 } 131 500 } (1)
Direct materials 33 600 24 000
Direct labours 84 000 60 000
OT premium 9 000 (1) 47 500
Contribution 57 700 (1) 47 500 (1)
Non-financial factors (1 mark each for any two):
For Option 1
• capacity can be fully used (1)
• workers are happy to work overtime because they can earn more (1)
For Option 2
• no overtime (as the number of units produced will be less than 1200) which will improve efficiency (1)
• spare capacity can be kept in reserve for other urgent orders (1)
Accept other valid responses
1 mark for decision e.g. the directors should choose Option 1 and accept the orders of A, B and C (1)

 

2 Read Source B in the Insert.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the payback period in years and days

Calculate the payback period in years and days.
Cash inflow Cash outflow Net cash flow
Year $ $ $
1 200 000 140 000 60 000 }
2 230 000 130 000 100 000 }
3 240 000 110 000 130 000 }
4 210 000 100 000 110 000 } (1)
400 000
$300 000 – ($60 000 + $100 000 + $130 000) = $10 000
($10 000/$110 000) × 365 = 34 days
3 years 34 days (1)

 

(ii) the accounting rate of return to two decimal places

Calculate the accounting rate of return to two decimal places.
Average profit ($400 000 – $300 000)/4 = $25 000
Average investment $300 000/2 = $150 000
$25 000 (1)/$150 000 (1) = 16.67% (1)OF

 

(iii) the net present value

Calculate the net present value.
Net cash flow 10% NPV
Year $ $
0 (300 000) 1 (300 000) (1)
1 60 000 0.909 54 540 }
2 100 000 0.826 82 600 }
3 130 000 0.751 97 630 }
4 110 000 0.683 75 130 } (1)
9 900 (1)OF

 

(iv) the internal rate of return to two decimal places.

Calculate the internal rate of return to two decimal places.
Net cashflow 12% NPV
Year $ $
0 (300 000) 1 (300 000)
1 60 000 0.893 53 580
2 100 000 0.797 79 700
3 130 000 0.712 92 560
4 110 000 0.636 69 960
 (4 200) (1)
(10% + [$9900/($9900 + $4200)] × (12% – 10%)) (1) = 11.40% (1)OF
OR
(12% – [$4200/($9900 + $4200)] × (12% – 10%)) (1) = 11.40% (1)OF

 

(b) Advise the directors whether Z Limited should purchase the machine to manufacture the new
product.
Justify your answer with reference to financial and non-financial factors.

Advise the directors whether Z Limited should purchase the machine to manufacture the new product.
Justify your answer with reference to financial and non-financial factors.
3 marks for financial factors (1 mark for each factor up to a maximum of three)
3 marks for non-financial factors (1 mark for each factor up to a maximum of three)
1 mark for decision
Financial factors (max 3):
The investment has a positive net present value, i.e. $9900 (1)
Payback period (3 years 34 days) is before end of the investment (4 years) (1)
IRR (11.40%) is higher than the cost of capital (10%) (1)
ARR (16.67%) is higher than the cost of capital (10%) (1)
Non-financial factors (max 3):
Staff training (1)
Reliability of raw materials supply from new supplier (1)
Availability of qualified specialised engineer (1)
An opportunity to develop new product/capability of the business/new market (1)
Decision
Z Limited should purchase the machine to manufacture the new product with reason given e.g. as the higher NPV, IRR and
ARR outweigh the non-financial factors (1)
Accept other valid responses
Own figure rule applies

 

Additional information
The expected cost of the machine, $300 000, includes an import duty of 20%. The import duty has
increased to 30% due to a recent unfavourable trade agreement.
(c) Explain the impact of this increase in the import duty on the decision in

(b).
Support your answer with calculations.

Explain the impact of this increase in the import duty on the decision in (b).
Support your answer with calculations.
The new cost of the machine will be:
($300 000/120%) × 130% = $325 000 (1), increase in cost of $25 000 (1)
Payback period will now be
$325 000 – ($60 000 + $100 000 + 130 000) = $35 000
($35 000/$110 000) × 365 = 117 days
3 years 117 days (1) OR – 3 years 34 days = 83 more days to payback (1)
Accounting rate of return (ARR) will now be
$75 000/4 = $18 750
ARR = ($18 750/$162 500) × 100 = 11.54% (1) OR ARR has declined (1)
Net present value (NPV) will be
$9900 – $25 000 = ($15 100) (1) OR change from positive NPV to negative NPV (1)
The increase in import duty will affect the decision, meaning that Z Limited should not purchase the machine to manufacture
the new product (1) mainly due to a negative NPV (1)
Accept other valid responses

BUSINESS 9609

Section A (Short Answer)

1 (a) Define the term ‘laissez-faire leadership’.

Ans: Define the term ‘laissez-faire leadership’.
• a relaxed / hands-off / laid-back approach (1)
• less control / authority / supervision by managers (1)
• employees trusted to take decisions (1)
• employees have authority to initiate and complete projects / delegation
(1)
Sound definition 2 of the factors listed above (2 marks)
Partial definition 1 of the factors listed above (1 mark)
No creditable content (0 marks

 

(b) Explain two disadvantages to employees of autocratic leadership.

Ans: Explain two disadvantages to employees of autocratic leadership.
Answers could include:
• The strict supervision might be demotivating.
• A lack of ideas from the employees; they do not feel valued or trusted.
• One-way communication; the ideas of employees are not heard.
• A lack of motivation / job satisfaction / morale.
• Less chance for employees to ask questions.
• Less chance/opportunity for employee creativity.
• Lack of trust between managers and employees.
• Decisions only taken by hierarchy, do not reflect the business as a whole.
• Accept any other valid response.
Sound explanation of two disadvantages to employees of autocratic
leadership. (3 marks)
Sound explanation of one disadvantage to employees of autocratic leadership
or a partial explanation of two disadvantages. (2 marks)
Partial explanation of one disadvantage to employees of autocratic leadership
or a list of two disadvantages. (1 mark)
No creditable content (0 mark) 

 

2 (a) Define the term ‘market segmentation’.

Ans: Define the term ‘market segmentation’.
• an approach to marketing (1)
• identifies different sub-groups within a market (1)
• targeting different products to each market segment / type of customer (1)
• segmentation might be due to age / social factors / income levels /
geographic / sociological factors. (1)
• customers with similar needs/characteristics (1)
Sound definition 2 of the factors listed above (2 marks)
Partial definition 1 of the factors listed above (1 mark)
No creditable content (0 marks) 

 

(b) Explain two benefits to a business of market segmentation.

Ans: Explain two benefits to a business of market segmentation.
Answers could include:
• better able to target potential customers.
• target only segments that have high demand to maximise profits.
• marketing costs can be lowered due to more specific targeting.
• marketing personalised to maintain brand loyalty.
• different strategies can be used for different segments.
• products/services can be designed/developed to satisfy very specific
needs of a group of consumers.
• businesses can possibly use price discrimination by charging different
prices to different sub-groups/segments.
• Accept any other valid response.
Sound explanation of two benefits to a business of market segmentation.
(3 marks)
Sound explanation of one benefit to a business of market segmentation or a
partial explanation of two benefits. (2 marks)
Partial explanation of one benefit to a business of market segmentation or a
list of two benefits. (1 mark)
No creditable content (0 marks) 

 

3 Explain the advantages to a manufacturing business of using sale and leaseback of non-current
assets as a source of finance.

Ans: Explain the advantages to a manufacturing business of using sale and
leaseback of non-current assets as a source of finance.
Answers could include:
• Where a business sells an asset in order to raise finance and leases the
same asset back from the new owner.
• The business will have an inflow of money which could be large if the
non-current asset is, for example, a building. This can be used to fund
projects or equipment.
• The business will still have access to and use of the asset after the sale,
therefore the sale should not cause any disruption to the operation of the
business.
• The payment of regular lease payments can allow for ease of budgeting
for a business.
• The maintenance of the asset is usually taken over by the new owner,
therefore reducing ongoing maintenance costs for the business when it
leases the asset back.
• Accept any other valid response.
Effective explanation of the advantages to a manufacturing business of using
sale and leaseback of non-current assets as a source of finance. (4–5 marks)
Limited explanation of the advantages to a manufacturing business of using
sale and leaseback of non-current assets as a source of finance. (2–3 marks)
Explanation of sale and leaseback. (1 mark)
No creditable content (0 marks)

 

4 (a) Define the term ‘inventory reorder level’

Ans: Define the term ‘inventory reorder level’.
• trigger amount / pre-set level of inventory (1)
• where / at which point a business would place a new order for
inventory (1)
• allows time for new inventory to arrive before current stock runs out (1)
Sound definition 2 of the factors listed above (2 marks)
Partial definition 1 of the factors listed above (1 mark)
No creditable content (0 marks) 

 

(b) Explain two advantages to a business of holding buffer inventory.

Ans: Explain two advantages to a business of holding buffer inventory.
Answers could include:
• Allows a business to meet increases in demand.
• It prevents shortages in the case of a late delivery or disruption of
production of work in progress.
• It allows a business to take advantage of bulk buying discounts that can
significantly reduce the costs of inventory.
• Reduces the effect of price fluctuations.
• Accept any other valid response.
Sound explanation of two advantages to a business of holding buffer
inventory. (3 marks)
Sound explanation of one advantage to a business or partial explanation of
two advantages. (2 marks)
Partial explanation of one advantage to a business of holding buffer inventory
or a list of two. (1 mark)
No creditable content. (0 marks)

 

Section B (Essay)

5 (a) Analyse the role of small businesses in a country’s economy.

Ans: Analyse the role of small businesses in a country’s economy.
Level Description Marks
4 Good analysis of the role of small businesses in a
country’s economy.
7–8
3 Limited analysis of the role of small businesses in a
country’s economy.
5–6
2 Application of the role of small businesses in a country’s
economy.
3–4
1 Knowledge and understanding of the role of small
businesses.
1–2
0 No creditable content. 0
Answers could include:
Knowledge and Understanding 2 marks
• Clear understanding of the role of small businesses
Application 2 marks
• Reference to the role of small businesses in an economy
Analysis 4 marks
Small businesses:
• contribute to the economic growth of the country
• can react quickly to changes in the economy
• are numerous in most countries
• might employ a small number of people individually, but collectively
create a lot of jobs
• might provide goods/services that larger businesses do not e.g. personal
services such as hairdressers, plumbers, electricians, car maintenance
• sometimes grow into larger businesses and contribute even more to the
economy
• are located all over the country and not in one location like many larger
businesses
• will pay tax to the government which can then be used for e.g. improved
infrastructure or education etc.
• often service the needs of larger businesses
• offer specialised products/services
• might increase competition – perhaps leading to improved quality, lower
prices.
• Accept any other valid response.

 

(b) Discuss the importance to an expanding business of effectively communicating its objectives
to its workforce.

Ans:  Discuss the importance to an expanding business of effectively
communicating its objectives to its workforce.
Level Description Marks
4
Effective evaluation of the importance to an expanding
business of effectively communicating its objectives to its
workforce.
9–12
3 Limited evaluation of the importance to a business of
communicating its objectives to its workforce. 7–8
2 Analysis and application of communicating business
objectives to the workforce. 3–6
1 Knowledge and understanding of communication /
business objectives / workforce. 1–2
0 No creditable content. 0
Answers could include:
Knowledge and Understanding 2 marks
• Clear understanding of communication
• Clear understanding of business objectives
• Clear understanding of workforce
Application 2 marks
• Reference to communication with a workforce
• Reference to business objectives
Analysis 2 marks
• Business objectives: the aims or targets which a business sets that it
will strive to achieve in the future.
• Objectives can be broken down into divisional, departmental or
individual targets, but they all work towards the overall objective of a
business.
• Communicating will aid the co-ordination of activities.
• For communication to be effective the objectives must be understood.
Managers must make sure that each employee understands what is
required of them in order to meet the overall objectives.
• Employees who do not know or understand what the business is trying
to achieve are less likely to work towards that goal.
• The workforce includes some levels of management – if they are not
clear about the business objectives then their guidance to employees
might lack the required focus.
• Large/expanding business – many employees – can be difficult to
communicate with large numbers of people. Some people might not
get the information.
• For large businesses, perhaps with many departments or different
geographical locations it is essential that all parts of the business know
exactly what they need to achieve and by what time in order for the
business to succeed in meeting its objectives. 

Evaluation 6 marks
• A candidate should make a judgement as to the importance to an
expanding business of effectively communicating its objectives to its
workforce.
• These judgements may be made at any point as well as in a concluding
section.
• The context is an expanding business.
• Issues are identified that could make effective communication difficult
and/or vital.
• Attempt made to assess the importance of communication, not other
problems of an expanding business.
• Accept any other valid response.

 

6 ‘An accurate cash flow forecast is the most important financial document for a clothing retailer
when planning to enter a new market.’
Discuss the extent to which you agree with this view.

Ans:  ‘An accurate cash flow forecast is the most important financial
document for a clothing retailer when planning to enter a new market.’
Discuss the extent to which you agree with this view.
Level Description Marks
5 Effective evaluation of the extent to which an accurate
cash flow forecast is the most important financial
document for a clothing retailer when planning to enter a
new market.
17–20
4 Limited evaluation of the extent to which an accurate cash
flow forecast is the most important financial document for
a business when planning to enter a new market.
15–16
3 Good analysis of whether an accurate cash flow forecast
is an important financial document for a business when
planning to enter a new market.
11–14
2 Limited analysis with application of whether a cash flow
forecast is an important financial document for a business.
5–10
1 Knowledge and understanding of cash flow forecasts /
financial documents / entering a new market.
1–4
0 No creditable content. 0
Answers could include:
Knowledge and Understanding 4 marks
• Clear understanding of cash flow forecasts
• Clear understanding of financial documents
• Clear understanding of entering a new market
Application 4 marks
• Reference to the importance of cash flow forecasts
• Reference to the use of financial documents
• Reference to a business planning to enter a new market
Analysis 6 marks
• Cash flow forecast is a prediction of cash inflows and outflows that the
business knows will occur in the future and those that it can reasonably
expect to occur.
• It is a prediction of things that have not yet happened.
• Other financial documents include income statement, etc. Most other
financial documents are historic i.e. they record revenue, expenditures
and asset values from a previous time period. 

• Cash flow forecasts are produced –
– to predict any known or anticipated expenses with entering the new
market e.g. advertising costs, staffing costs, transport costs
– to plan for any expected changes in cash flows such as seasonal
changes depending on the type of clothing sold by this business.
– to set targets for the new market. Success of the move into a new
market can be judged/measured by comparing the predictions in the cash
flow forecast with what actually happened, to learn for the future.
– to allow the business to undertake What if analysis of possible
outcomes from this venture.
– Arguments for the other financial documents:
– The business is likely to need to know its working capital, retained
earnings, profit margins etc. All of which are taken from the income
statement.
– A potential lender might want to see all financial documents to
determine the financial strength of the business overall and not just the
viability of the new market venture.
Evaluation 6 marks
• A candidate should make a judgement as to the extent to which an
accurate cash flow forecast is the most important financial document for a
clothing retailer when planning to enter a new market.
• These judgements may be made at any point as well as in a concluding
section.
• The context is a clothing retailer.
• Are other financial documents as/more important than a CFF?
• Does the business need an injection of finance to allow them to move into
a new market?
• All financial documents have a purpose/usefulness. It is likely that all
financial documents will be important in making such a move, but the
cash flow forecast will give some idea of the cash flow outcomes of the
new market but not the overall profitability.
It might depend on what the new market is: is it a new geographical
market, a new market in terms of demographic e.g. from clothing for
children to adult clothes; from clothing for women to clothing for men.
• A lot could depend on how different the new market is from the one the
business currently operates in.
• Accept any other valid response.

 

7 (a) Analyse the benefits to a business of focusing on staff morale and welfare.

Ans: 

Analyse the benefits to a business of focusing on staff morale and
welfare.
Level Description Marks
4 Good analysis of the benefits to a business of focusing on
staff morale and welfare.
7–8
3 Limited analysis of the benefits to a business of focusing
on staff morale and/or welfare.
5–6
2 Application of the benefits to a business of focusing on
staff morale and/or welfare.
3–4
1 Knowledge and understanding of staff morale/welfare. 1–2
0 No creditable content. 0
Answers could include:
Knowledge and Understanding 2 marks
• Clear understanding of staff morale
• Clear understanding of staff welfare
Application 2 marks
• Reference to staff morale and/or welfare in a business
Analysis 4 marks
• Staff morale refers to the level of confidence and enthusiasm that
employees feel towards their place of work employers.
• Welfare refers to the health and happiness of employees.
• A business that takes steps to ensure that staff morale is as high as
possible and that the welfare of employees is important to it, is likely to
benefit from having a more highly motivated workforce.
• When employees feel that their needs are important to their employers,
they have increased enthusiasm for work / loyalty to the business and
therefore a willingness to work hard for the business.
• Employees might be more willing to suggest improvements to the
workplace if they feel that their contribution is valued.
• An employee who receives help and advice when needed is likely to be a
more productive employee. A problem outside work can contribute to
poor performance in the workplace. A business that helps to remove that
external problem is likely to benefit.
• Less labour turnover and reduction in time and money involved in
recruitment and selection of new employees.
• Less risk of damaged/poor reputation of the business.
• A business focusing on staff morale and welfare is likely to make sure
that all health and safety guidelines are followed therefore making
employees feel safe in the workplace. Employees will also feel that their
safety is important to their employers.

Staff morale can also be affected by employers paying attention to
equality and diversity; all of which leads to employees having confidence
that they will be treated fairly, regardless of gender, race, religion etc.
This can make a business attractive to potential employees.

 

(b) Discuss whether the ideas of David McClelland could help managers of a hospital to satisfy
the human needs of its employees.

Ans: Discuss whether the ideas of David McClelland could help managers of
a hospital to satisfy the human needs of its employees.
Level Description Marks
4 Effective evaluation of whether the ideas of David
McClelland could help managers of a hospital to satisfy
the human needs of its employees.
9–12
3 Limited evaluation of whether the ideas of David
McClelland could help managers of a business to satisfy
the human needs of its employees.
7–8
2 Analysis and application of how a business could use the
ideas of David McClelland to satisfy the human needs of
its employees.
3–6
1 Understanding of David McClelland’s ideas / managers /
human needs / employees.
1–2
0 No creditable content. 0
Answers could include:
Knowledge and Understanding 2 marks
• Clear understanding of the ideas of David McClelland
• Clear understanding of managers
• Clear understanding of human needs
• Clear understanding of employees
Application 2 marks
• Reference to the use of McClelland’s ideas
• Reference to satisfying human needs
Analysis 2 marks
• Human needs: to be able to feed and clothe oneself; to have shelter
(somewhere to live); to have some level of social interaction. Some
people also desire social acceptance or respect of their peers/colleagues.
• McClelland identified three key motivational factors: Achievement,
Affiliation and Authority.
• Achievement: some employees need to feel that their contribution to the
hospital is recognised and appreciated. Workers who feel that they are
fulfilling their potential within a hospital are more likely to feel comfortable
and support the hospital. By recognising the achievements of employees
and possibly rewarding them, their need for acceptance could be met.
• Affiliation: meeting the needs of employees to feel a part of the hospital
can be achieved by using focus groups to discuss ways of best dealing
with any potential problems. Employees who feel involved are likely to
have a more positive view of the hospital, while at the same time, working
as part of a group can be meeting their need for social interaction. 

Authority/Power: Some employees need to feel that they have some
input/impact on their work practices. If they are given some input into e.g.
how changes will be implemented, then they feel some level of authority
over the way the hospital is operating and adapting, perhaps in how
patients are cared for. If they can be involved in a decision-making
process, employees need for authority can be met as well as their human
need of recognition and respect.
Evaluation 6 marks
• A candidate should make a judgement as to whether the ideas of David
McClelland could help managers of a hospital to satisfy the human needs
of its employees.
• These judgements may be made at any point as well as in a concluding
section.
• The context is a hospital.
• The extent to which the ideas of McClelland can meet the human needs
of employees should be judged.
• It can depend on the current approach used by managers in a hospital
and the extent to which the employees are involved in discussion about
any changes or issues facing the hospital.
• McClelland’s three factors can meet the human needs of employees, but
it requires a level of involvement and trust on the part of the hospital
managers.
• Accept any other valid response.

1 Ray’s Taxis (RT)
Ray is a sole trader providing a taxi service in city L. Recently, demand for Ray’s taxi has
fallen due to an increase in the number of competitors. Ray is thinking of joining Summus,
who offer a smartphone app (application) which connects passengers to taxi drivers. Ray
would be the first taxi driver in city L to join Summus. The app uses dynamic pricing to set
the fare (amount paid) for a journey. Summus takes 20% of the fare and the remaining
80% is revenue for the taxi driver.
Summus has provided forecast data in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1: Forecast data about each taxi using the Summus app
Average fare $15
Average number of journeys per day 16
Average distance travelled per journey 5km
Ray has calculated costs, shown in Table 1.2.
Table 1.2: Ray’s costs
$
Fixed cost per day 42
Variable cost per km 0.50
Passengers like the Summus app as it is easy to use, quick and reliable. Taxi drivers like it
as they can decide when and where to work and they can earn more revenue. However, a
recent article on a taxi drivers’ forum suggested there are problems with Summus.
• It signs up too many taxi drivers.
• Taxi drivers are not employed by Summus and are not guaranteed any revenue.
• Customers have to wait longer for a taxi when fares are low.
(a) (i) Define the term ‘competitors’ (line 2). [2]
(ii) Explain the term ‘dynamic pricing’ (line 4). [3]
(b) (i) Explain one way Ray could increase his profit margin. [3]
(ii) Refer to Table 1.1. Calculate Ray’s forecast average daily revenue if he joins Summus.
[3]
(c) Analyse two pricing methods, other than dynamic pricing, Summus could use to price taxi
fares. [8]
(d) Recommend whether Ray should join Summus. Justify your recommendation. [11]

 

Ans:

1(a)(i) Define the term ‘competitors’ (line 2).
Knowledge Marks
A correct definition / to the same/ similar market 2
A partial, vague or unfocused definition / same or similar
product
1
No creditable content 0
Content
• One mark for other businesses/individuals
• One mark for same/similar market; same/similar product
• Other businesses (1) offering the same product or service (1)
• Other similar businesses (1) that sell similar goods/services (1)
• A rival person/organisation/company/firm (1) in the same or similar
industry (1) trying to reach the same/similar target market (1) 

 

1(a)(ii) Explain the term ‘dynamic pricing’ (line 4).
Award one mark for each point of explanation:
C Example or some other way of showing good
understanding
1 mark
B Understanding of dynamic (changes in response to
market/demand/time of day etc)
1 mark
A Understanding of pricing (allow any understanding of a
quantitative value)
e.g. quantitative value/amount/figure charged/cost
1 mark
Content
Varying what the customer pays (1) for a product or service to reflect
changing market conditions (1) such as higher prices at peak times (1) to
maximise revenue (1) e.g. often used on apps or websites (1)
Allows firms to set prices according to demand. Businesses adjust prices on
apps or websites. Flexible pricing in real-time.
Exemplar Mark Rationale
What the customer pays varies
due to changing demand factors
e.g. monitored on websites
3 A, B and C – websites shows
HOW the price can change
constantly
What the customer pays varies
due to changing demand factors
2 A and B mark – explanation
of why prices change
Pricing which changes due to
factors such as demand
1 B mark – flexible pricing
Price varies CONSTANTLY 1 B mark – flexible pricing
Pricing that changes/differs from
time to time
1 No A mark – B mark only
Changes due to distance 1
Pricing that changes 0 Too vague

 

1(b)(i) Explain one way Ray could increase his profit margin.
Level Knowledge and Application Marks
2 (APP+APP) Explanation of a factor which would increase
the profit margin in context
3
2a (APP) Explanation of a factor which would increase
profit in context
2
1a (K) Identification of a factor affecting profit 1
0 No creditable content 0
Content
Increase number of journeys without a change in taxi maintenance costs
Reduce costs without change in number of journeys/price eg buying an
electric car
Negotiate a higher (than 80%) return from Summus
Work longer hours as Summus fixed costs do not change
ARA
Exemplar Mark Rationale
Increases number of taxi
journeys which reduce fixed
costs per journey
3 Explanation of a factor in
context
Increases number of taxi
journeys
2 Explanation of a factor not in
context
Increase the prices 1 Affects profit margin
Decrease prices to increase
revenue and profit
1 Profit, not profit margin

 

1(b)(ii) Refer to Table 1.1. Calculate Ray’s forecast average daily revenue if he
joins Summus.
Rationale Marks
Correct answer with or without correct working or $ 3
Attempt with correct figures 2
Formula/attempt to calculate 1
No creditable content 0
Content
Revenue = (P × Q) (1)
= ($15 × 16 journeys) = 240 (2)
= $240 × 80% = 192 (3)
= $192 (3)

 

1(c) Analyse two pricing methods, other than dynamic pricing, Summus
could use to price taxi fares.
Level
Knowledge and
Application
(4 marks)
Marks Analysis
(4 marks) Marks
2b Shows
understanding of two
methods of pricing in
context
4 Developed analysis
of two methods of
pricing in context
4
2a Shows
understanding of
one method of
pricing in context
3 Developed analysis
of one method of
pricing in context
3
1b Shows knowledge of
two methods of
pricing
2 Limited analysis of
two methods of
pricing
2
1a Shows knowledge of
one method of
pricing
1 Limited analysis of
one method of
pricing
1
0 No creditable content
Content
Any two pricing methods such as competitive, penetration, skimming.
Context could come from competitive market, new service in city L.
Note:
• Do not reward dynamic as in the case study.
• Be careful to distinguish between pricing methods for customers
and payment methods for drivers
Identification
of pricing
method
(K -1)
Understanding
in context
(APP)
Limited
analysis (AN)
Developed
analysis in
context (Dev)
Competitive As increasing
competition (in
city L)
Which would
mean the USP
may make them
more popular
Which would
lead to an
increase in
demand/revenue
Penetration to increase
brand
awareness for
taxi’s (in city L)
Which would
lead to an
increase of
customers in the
short term
And hopefully
long term
customer loyalty

 

Recommend whether Ray should join Summus. Justify your
recommendation.
Knowledge and
Application
(4 marks)
Marks
Annotation
Analysis and
Evaluation
(7 marks)
Marks
Annotation
A justified
recommendation based
on developed
arguments
7
EVAL + EVAL + EVAL
A developed
recommendation based
on developed
arguments
6
EVAL + EVAL
A basic
recommendation/evaluat
ion based on developed
arguments
5
EVAL
Shows understanding of two
elements of decision making
in context
3–4
APP + APP
Two arguments based
on two elements of
decision making in
context
4
DEV + DEV
Shows understanding of one
element of decision making
in context
APP One argument based on
one element of decision
making in context
3
DE

 

Knowledge and
Application
(4 marks)
Marks
Annotation
Analysis and
Evaluation
(7 marks)
Marks
Annotation
Shows knowledge of
decision making
1–2
K + K
Limited analysis of two
or more elements of
decision making
2
AN + AN
K
Limited analysis of one
element of decision
making
1
AN
No creditable content
Content
Knowledge and understanding
• Factors affecting knowledge of decision making for a business
Application
• Ray’s demand has fallen
• Increasing competitors
• No other taxi drivers employed by Summus in city L
• App uses dynamic pricing
• Ray gets 80% / Sumus gets 20%
• Data from Table 1.1 and 1.2
• Passengers like Summus app
• Taxi drivers like Summus App
• Signs of too many taxi drivers
• Drivers not employed
• Drivers not guaranteed revenue
• Longer customer waiting times when fares are low
Analysis
• Analysis of reasons for and against Ray joining Summus
Evaluation
• A recommendation for Ray based on arguments in context as to
whether he should or should not join Summus
• A judgement over which argument is most important
• An evaluation of the level of argument
• What the judgement/evaluation might depend upon.

 

 

2 Juliet’s Theatre Group (JTG)
Juliet and her friends would all like careers in acting. They have formed a co-operative
called JTG which is based in city M. JTG is planning to hire a theatre in city M so that the
co-operative members can act in a play. The theatre has 300 seats but Juliet has set a
target of 200 customers to break even. This should ensure a margin of safety. City M is
a large city with many theatres and music venues. Juliet estimates that they can sell 150
tickets in advance to friends, family and on the internet. Unsold tickets will be available to
buy on the night of the performance.
JTG is planning to perform the play at the hired theatre in city M for one night only. Financial
information is shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1: Financial information ($)
Theatre hire per night (paid in advance) 600
Costume hire 200
Printing tickets 100
Variable costs per ticket 2
Juliet has proposed going to different cities with the play, putting on performances for one
night in each city.
Arpitter is a business consultant and has offered some advice. She thinks that JTG should
put on performances only in city M and has given the following reasons:
• there is a suitable venue in city M
• it is easier to build customer loyalty
• minimal costs.
Juliet disagrees. She thinks that JTG could:
• build up a larger customer base by going to other cities
• perform the same play in different cities so no need to rehearse other plays
• access government grants for travelling acting groups.
(a) (i) Define the term ‘margin of safety’ (line 4). [2]
(ii) Explain the term ‘co-operative’ (line 1). [3]
(b) (i) Refer to Table 2.1. Calculate the price that JTG should charge per ticket in order to break
even at 200 ticket sales. [3]
(ii) Explain one advantage to JTG of using break-even analysis. [3]
(c) Analyse two elements of the marketing mix which would be useful to JTG in marketing its
play. [8]
(d) Evaluate whether JTG should perform only in city M. [11]

 

Ans: 

2(a)(i) Define the term ‘margin of safety’ (line 4).

Knowledge Marks
A correct definition 2
A partial, vague or unfocused definition 1
No creditable content 0
Content
A link to breakeven
Knowledge of the difference between breakeven and actual output
The difference between the break-even level of output (1) and the actual
level of output. (1)

ARA
Exemplar Mark Rationale
The difference between the BE
and actual level of output
2 Clear understanding
The output over breakeven 2 Correct answer
The revenue over the breakeven
point
1 Understanding of difference
Anything explaining JUST
breakeven
1 Partial definition

 

2(a)(ii) Explain the term ‘co-operative’ (line 1)
Award one mark for each point of explanation:
Marks
C Example or some other way of showing good
understanding e.g. share the profits between members or
provides a job for members
3
B Members could be employees, customers or local
residents/community
2
A Businesses owned and run for and by their members 1
C marks dependent on A and B mark being present
Content
Businesses owned and run for and by their members. Members could be
employees, customers or local residents/community. Members have an
equal say in business decisions and share the profits.
NOTE – be careful not to award marks for a description of a partnership
ARA
Exemplar Mark Rationale
A business owned and run by
members who share total profits
3 All three elements
A business owned and run by
members such as employees
2 No expansion
Owned and run by employees 1 No understanding of being a
member
Owned and run by members 1 No understanding of who
members are
Several people come together to
create a business
0 No ownership or decision
making

 

2(b)(i) Refer to Table 2.1. Calculate the price that JTG should charge per
ticket in order to break even at 200 ticket sales.
Rationale Marks
Correct answer, with or without working and $ sign 3
Attempt to calculate with correct figures 2
Formula/attempt to calculate 1
No creditable content 0
Content
Fixed costs = $900
Variable costs = $2 per ticket
BE = 200 tickets
BE = FC / (P – VC) (1)
200 = 900 / (P – 2)
P – 2 = 900/200
P – 2 = 4.50 (2) (if working present)
Price per ticket = $6.50 (3)
Content
Fixed costs = $900
Variable costs = $2 per ticket
BE = 200 tickets
Total costs @ breakeven level =
$1300 (1)
1300/200 (2)
PPT = ($) 6.50 (3)

 

2(b)(ii) Explain one advantage to JTG of using break-even analysis.
Level Knowledge and Application Marks
2a (App) Explanation of one advantage of using break
even analysis in context
3
1b (K+K) Explanation of one advantage of using break
even analysis
2
1a (K) Identifies one advantage of using break even
analysis
1
0 No creditable content 0
Useful for pricing tickets.
Can carry out ‘what if’ analysis e.g. what if JTC cannot sell 200 tickets in
advance?
OFR
ARA
Exemplar Mark Rationale
Can help in making pricing
decisions to ensure a profit is
made for the single theatre
performance
3 1 advantage explained in
context
Identify how many tickets should
be sold to reach the amount
they need to breakeven
3 1 advantage explained in
context
Can help in making pricing
decisions to ensure a profit is
made
2 1 advantage explained
Can help in making pricing
decisions
1 One advantage id’d

Less waste as can identify the
BE point
0 You need excess to make
profit

 

2(c) Analyse two elements of the marketing mix which would be useful to
JTG in marketing its play.
Level Knowledge and
Application
(4 marks)
Marks Analysis
(4 marks)
Marks
2b Shows
understanding of two
elements of the
marketing mix in
context
4 Developed analysis
of two elements of
the marketing mix in
context
4
2a Shows
understanding of
one element of the
marketing mix in
context
3 Developed analysis
of one element of
the marketing mix in
context
3
1b Shows knowledge of
two elements of the
marketing mix
2 Limited analysis of
two elements of the
marketing mix
2
1a Shows knowledge of
one element of the
marketing mix
1 Limited analysis of
one element of the
marketing mix
1
0 No creditable content
Content
Place – Is the theatre in a good
location
Consumer wants and needs
Price – Break-even price could be
used from 2bi
Cost to consumer
Promotion – Cost, probably a
limited budget
Convenience to consumer
Product – is the play suitable for
the audience
Communication to consumer

Identification
of marketing
mix
(K)
Understanding
in context
(APP)
Limited
analysis (AN)
Developed
analysis in
context (Dev)
Price Breakeven price
– $6.50 (or
OFR)
Useful to attract
customers
Which increases
revenue
Place
(distribution
channel)
Sales on the
internet
Buying on the
night
Allows
convenience for
customer in
ticket
purchasing
Which would
increase ticket
sales
Product Is in a 300 seat
theatre
Anything to do
with plays/
performances/1
night only
Increases
customer
satisfaction
Which
gets/spreads
brand
awareness
Promotion Co-operative/
any promotion
method related
to theatre
Which boosts
customer
awareness
Which leads to
an increase in
demand

Section A

1 Analyse the advantages to PGC of using enterprise resource planning (ERP).

Ans:  Analyse the advantages to PGC of using enterprise resource planning
(ERP).
Level Knowledge
3 marks
Application
2 marks
Analysis
5 marks
2 3 marks
Knowledge of ERP
and two benefits
2 marks
Two points applied
to PGC
3–5 marks
Good use of theory
and/or reasoned
argument to
answer question
1 1–2 marks
Knowledge of ERP
and benefit (2)
Knowledge of ERP
(1)
1 mark
One point applied
to PGC
1–2 marks
Some use of
theory and/or
reasoned argument
to answer question
0 No creditable content
Knowledge
• ERP is using dedicated software to integrate orders, materials, labour
and distribution to minimise cost, reduce inventory levels and waste
• ERP enables customer orders to match raw material supplies to enable
JIT
• ERP can improve a business’ efficiency in relation to: inventory control,
costing and pricing, capacity utilisation, responses to change,
management information
• Benefits of ERP
– Helps with inventory control.
– Reduces cost of ordering and holding inventory.
– Links information between departments – management information.
– Choosing best suppliers and most cost-effective suppliers and
supporting JIT manufacturing.
– Allocating jobs to appropriate production employees.
– Forecasting demand.
– Improved efficiency in terms of costing and pricing.
– Improved efficiency in terms of capacity utilisation

Application
• Supplies of coffee beans, roasting, packaging ground coffee.
• Customers are 600 small retail outlets.
• Too much inventory is being held.
• Customers expect fast delivery.
• Coffee is wasted by being stored too long.
• New roasters.
• Possible expansion plans include cafes, selling tea.
• Expansion plans rely on reducing costs.
• Link to mission statement ‘Quality coffee for everyone when they want it’.
• Selling price per tonne drops from $20 to $10 once ground coffee is 7
months old and to $0 after 12 months.
Analysis
• ERP enables customer orders to match raw material supplies to enable
JIT. This will reduce PGC costs of storage and reduction in value of
ground coffee due to ageing.
• Enables PGC’s orders to be delivered quickly, providing better customer
service and meeting customer expectations of fast delivery. This will help
retain customers
• Might enable quick decisions on marginally priced orders increasing
profitable sales
• Reduces cost of ordering and holding inventory, this will increase profit
• All departments can access same information so reduces communication
problems that could lead to customer dissatisfaction.
• Reduces waste due to deterioration in overlong storage thus improving
efficiency
• Enables rapid response to change and customised pricing improving
customer service
• Can be adapted to enable/facilitate expansion or new products
• Increases competitive advantage, this may help reverse decline in PGC’s
market share

 

2 (a) Refer to Table 1 and other information provided. Calculate, using net realisable value, the:
(i) value of packed ground coffee inventory at 30 April 2021

Ans: 

Refer to Table 1 and other information provided. Calculate, using net
realisable value, the:
(i) value of packed ground coffee inventory at 30 April 2021
NRV = saleable value of inventory – cost of selling it (1 mark if no relevant
calculation)
NRV of ground coffee 0–6 months = 2 × 20 – 0.5 = 39 500 (1)
NRV of ground coffee 7–12 months = 1 × 10 – 0.5 = 9 500 (1)
NRV of ground coffee over 12 months old = 0 (1)
NRV Total ground coffee 0–12 months = $49 000 (4)
Other answers:
Includes coffee beans $129 000 (3)
No subtraction of cost of selling inventory $50 000 (3)
Includes coffee beans and no subtraction of cost of selling inventory
$130 000 (2)
OFR

 

(ii) value of packed ground coffee inventory as a percentage of current assets at
30 April 2021.

Ans: (ii) value of packed ground coffee as a percentage of current assets.
OFR from 2(a)(i) applies
Current assets = 150 000
49 000 / 150 000 × 100 (1)
= 32.7% OR 33% (2) 

 

(b) Evaluate the difficulties for PGC of correctly valuing its inventory.

Ans: 

Evaluate the difficulties for PGC of correctly valuing its inventory.
Level Knowledge
2 marks
Application
2 marks
Analysis
3–4 marks
Evaluation
3–4 marks
2 2 marks
Two or more
relevant
points
2 marks
Two points
applied to
PGC
3–4 marks
Good use of
theory and/or
reasoned
argument to
answer
question
3–4 marks
Good
judgment
shown
1 1 mark
One relevant
point made
1 mark
One point
applied to
PGC
1–2 marks
Some use of
theory and/or
reasoned
argument to
answer
question
1–2 marks
Some
judgment
shown
0 No creditable content
OFR from 2(a) applies.
Knowledge
• Definition of inventory: Unsold goods, raw materials, work in progress.
• Inventory is a current asset.
• Methods of valuing inventory:
– Net Realisable Value = the amount the existing inventory can be
sold for – cost of selling it.
– Valued at original cost.
– FIFO inventory valuation – assumes oldest inventory is sold first.
– LIFO – assumes newest inventory is sold first [candidates are not
expected to know FIFO or LIFO]
– Inventory valuation is normally made at the lower of historical cost
and net realisable value.
– Accountants will apply rule of prudence when constructing the
accounts
• Role of inventory in statement of financial position. And the income
statement.
• Effect on accounting information of different valuation methods.
• Effect on calculation of depreciation.
• Stakeholder interest in correctly valued inventory.
Application
• Inventory includes coffee beans, packaged ground coffee of different
ages.
• 600 small retail customers – orders vary in frequency and size.
• Use of NRV calculated in 2(a)
• New inventory manager and accountant’s view

Analysis
• Price of coffee beans and ground coffee is volatile due to supply issues
e.g. weather and disease. Therefore, the value of coffee inventory will
also be variable and volatile. So it is difficult to measure the saleable
value of coffee as market conditions change or are hard to assess.
• Coffee deteriorates and therefore the value changes over time making
an accurate value difficult to determine.
• Deterioration of coffee and therefore its value depends on the conditions
in which it is kept such as humidity and temperature.
• Value measured at one time, may not be representative of other times.
• Some inventory may never be sold or used thus its measured value may
be inaccurate.
• Difficulty in assigning cost of selling inventory and therefore difficult to
calculate NRV.
Evaluation
• Ranking difficulties in order
• Most important difficulty in valuing inventory of coffee
• Pressure to make profit figures as high as possible or tax payable as low
as possible could result in mis valuation. (Window dressing). Inventory
valuation has a major impact on reported profit levels.
• Incorrect valuation could lead to lower or higher profits being shown.
Each of these has disadvantages.
• Legal or regulatory requirement to value inventory correctly in accounts

 

3 Recommend a coordinated marketing mix for the new barista courses.

Ans:    Recommend a coordinated marketing mix for the new barista courses.
Level Knowledge
2 marks
Application
2 marks
Analysis
6 marks
Evaluation
6 marks
2 2 marks
Two or more
relevant
points
2 marks
Two points
applied to
PGC
4–6 marks
Good use of
theory and/or
reasoned
argument to
answer
question
4–6 marks
Good
judgment
shown
1 1 mark
One relevant
point made
1 mark
One point
applied to
PGC
1–3 marks
Some use of
theory and/or
reasoned
argument to
answer
question
1–3 marks
Some
judgment
shown
0 No creditable content 

Knowledge
• The place of the marketing mix in a marketing plan. Marketing objectives,
marketing budget and marketing strategy.
– Elements of marketing mix: – Price, Place, Promotion, Product.
– The 4 C’s of marketing – Consumer wants and needs, Cost,
Convenience, and Communication
• Understanding of different techniques within the marketing mix such as
different forms of promotion and pricing
• Concept of a coordinated marketing mix.
• The need for marketing objectives to be clear.
• Development of marketing strategies focused on achieving objectives.
• Market research to understand the market.
Application
• Marketing will be business to business (B2B).
– Target market is cafes and restaurants – qualifications for business
delegates. This may be different to the 600 retail outlets currently
served.
• PGC may also try to appeal to individuals seeking to gain a qualification
as a Barista
• One day training courses.
• Industry recognised formal qualifications.
• PGC have trainers and facilities ready to deliver courses.
• Possible new product for diversification.
• Implied objective of profit.
• Peter suggests that ‘we just have to find ways to communicate with this
target market’
Analysis
Chains of reasoning highlighting likely elements of marketing strategy:
• Objectives set and different target market will determine methods used in
the plan.
• Suggested elements of marketing mix linked to objectives and different
target markets.
• Suggested elements of marketing mix coordinated together in relation to
target markets.
• Price might be varied by number of trainees being sent on a course by a
business. This would boost sales.
• Relation of marketing this new product to marketing other PGC products.
Explanation of why marketing to cafes and restaurants might change
from marketing to retail outlets, e.g. advertising in appropriate trade
press and attending trade fairs/exhibitions.
• Suggested methods given a time scale and linked to objectives.
• Cost of suggested methods linked to possible resources available and
potential income.

Salespeople may be important for building trust and motivating
businesses to put employees on courses.
• B2B marketers must persuade decision makers of a company therefore
information must be concise and clear.
Evaluation
• Identification of most important element of marketing strategy and
justification.
– Businesses less likely to be influenced by persuasive advertising.
More interested in information.
– Need for market research prior to the marketing strategy as this is a
new market.
• Supported recommendation of a coordinated marketing mix.
• Indication of how successful the suggested mix might be.
• Success may depend on budget available and other factors, e.g.
competition, macro-economic factors.

 

4 (a) Refer to Appendix 1. Calculate:
(i) earliest start time (EST) for Activity F

Ans: Refer to Appendix 1. Calculate:
earliest start time (EST) for Activity F
Some attempt at identifying EST, e.g. additions of previous EST or definition
(1)
EST = 18 + 3 (1)
EST = 21 days (2)

 

(ii) total float for Activity D

Ans: total float for Activity D
Definition – Total float is max. time an activity can be delayed without
delaying the whole project (1 mark if no relevant equation or calculation)
LFT – duration – EST (1)
Total float = 21 – 2 – 0 (2)
= 19 days (3)

(iii) free float for Activity C.

Ans: free float for Activity C
Definition – Free float is max. time an activity can be delayed without
delaying the next activity (1 mark if no relevant equation or calculation)
EST next activity – duration – EST (1)
Free float = 18 – 6 – 0 (2)
= 12 days (3)

 

(b) Assess the role of critical path analysis (CPA) in the successful installation of the new coffee
roasting machines.

Ans: 

Assess the role of critical path analysis (CPA) in the successful
installation of the new coffee roasting machines.
Level Knowledge
2 marks
Application
2 marks
Analysis
3–4 marks
Evaluation
3–4 marks
2 2 marks
Two or more
relevant points
2 marks
Two points
applied to
PGC
3–4 marks
Good use of
theory and/or
reasoned
argument to
answer
question
3–4 marks
Good
judgment
shown
1 1 mark
One relevant
point made
1 mark
One point
applied to
PGC
1–2 marks
Some use of
theory and/or
reasoned
argument to
answer
question
1–2 marks
Some
judgment
shown
0 No creditable content
OFR from 4 (a and b) applies.
Knowledge:
Definition of network analysis: this is part of project management to ensure
that resources are used efficiently. Also known as critical path analysis it
identifies all tasks in a project, puts them in the correct sequence and allows
for the identification of the critical path.
• Critical path identified so managers focus on high priority activities.
• Key dates can be determined, and activities planned.
• Appropriate resources can be assembled.
• Progress can be monitored.
• Gives workforce a guide so that finishing date can be met.
• Managers are enabled to focus on high priority activities.
Application
• Reference to more efficient faster coffee roasters, enabling over capacity
at current production levels.
• Ideas for expansion (open cafes) rely on greater coffee production.
• Inexperienced new production manager has provided the information for
the CPA.
• Impact of installation on current production.
• Marketing plan timing following installation (planned for one week after).
• Use of data in Appendix 1:
– Minimum time of 28 days – Peter has set a deadline of one month.
– Non-critical activities B, C, D, G
– Critical path AEFH

Analysis
• CPA enables project duration to be calculated so that key dates can be
determined, and activities planned.
• CPA enables start times of activities to be known so that appropriate
resources can be assembled.
• CPA enables latest finish times to be known so that progress can be
monitored, and action taken if activities are not going to be on time.
• Knowing floats enables consequences of delays to be identified and
resource allocation altered to minimise disruption to schedules.
• Consequences of delays can be identified, and resource allocation
altered to make sure roasters are ready on time.
• CPA could set (unrealistic) targets that workers in striving to meet result
in errors and mistakes in installation
Evaluation
• Technique only as good as data – would production manager be best
person for collating this information?
• Difficulty of estimating activity durations – has contractor any input?
• CPA costs but is small compared to cost of project.
• Is CPA worthwhile for such a small simple project?

 

5 Evaluate the importance of workforce planning to the success of PGC’s proposed new cafés

Ans: 

Evaluate the importance of workforce planning to the success of PGC’s
proposed new cafes.
Level Knowledge
2 marks
Application
2 marks
Analysis
6 marks
Evaluation
6 marks
2 2 marks
Two or more
relevant points
2 marks
Two points
applied to
PGC
4–6 marks
Good use of
theory and/or
reasoned
argument to
answer
question
4–6 marks
Good
judgment
shown
1 1 mark
One relevant
point made
1 mark
One point
applied to
PGC
1–3 marks
Some use of
theory and/or
reasoned
argument to
answer
question
1–3 marks
Some
judgment
shown
0 No creditable content
Note: Workforce planning must be linked to café not other expansion plans
Knowledge
• Explanation of workforce planning – comparison of current staffing levels
and skills with future requirements
• Identification of numbers, skills and experience required for different
tasks/roles.
• Timescales for recruitment and selection of appropriate employees.
• Use of different types of contracts to make business flexible and save
labour costs, part-time, short-term, zero hours.
• Identify training needs of employees to meet future requirements
Application
• Different roles for sales staff managing/selling coffee and cakes in cafes.
– Baristas
– Waiting staff
– Kitchen employees to make cakes
– Supervisors and management
– ‘new set of skills’ (line 83) and Force Field Analysis
• Expansion plans will involve doubling the number of employees.
• WP to overcome the force against change given a relatively high
weighting of 3
• Organisational restructure required as a restraining force requiring a WP
• Reference to decision tree analysis, investment appraisal as these
include information on employment costings.

Analysis
• WP ensures right number of employees with the right skills in the right
place at the right time to deliver the services sold.
• Necessity of recruiting and selecting more employees with appropriate
skills for the new tasks.
• Setting up cafes requires significantly different roles to be identified.
• Comparison of forecast requirements with current employee numbers
and skills will enable recruitment and selection plans to be drawn up with
a timescale.
• Training needs for existing employees can be determined and resources
allocated to enable training.
• Workforce planning enables contribution to overall corporate budgets.
Evaluation
• Assessment of level of importance
• Comparison of importance in relation to a timescale linked to production
and marketing plans.
• What if? E.g. no workforce planning is done and the impact of this on
success of plans.
• Success relies on accurate forecasts – demand, number of jobs, success
in recruiting, cost estimates, etc.
• Forecasts derived from marketing forecasts – require good
communications with marketing department.
• Do PGC managers have ability to carry out workforce planning?

 

6 Evaluate the importance of PEST analysis to the directors as they consider whether PGC should
supply tea.

Ans: Evaluate the importance of PEST analysis to the directors as they
consider whether PGC should supply tea.
Knowledge
• Explanation of PEST as a technique of strategic analysis
• Understanding of role of other strategic analysis techniques such as
– Porter’s Five Forces
– SWOT
– Core competencies
• Knowledge of business vision/mission statements and objectives
• Role of strategic analysis in strategic management and planning
• Strategic Choice techniques that would be used in making decision
– Decision tree, investment appraisal, Force Field Analysis
Application
• SWOT, Porter’s 5 Forces analysis carried out and/or core competencies
used:
– Core competency – marketing hot drink ingredients (Strength in
SWOT).
– Porter – lower degree of rivalry in market for supplying tea.
• Link to mission statement.
• Use of PEST information in Table 3.
– Possible tax on coffee.
– Stable wholesale price of tea.
– Rising cost of coffee beans.
– Higher mark-up on tea.
– Tea healthier than coffee.
– Younger consumers increasingly prefer tea.
• Supplying tea to existing customer types.
• Reference to the first option (opening cafes).
• Reference to role of ERP.
• Lack of set objectives.
Analysis
• Consideration of why techniques lead to the recommendation or not.
• Consideration of why the analysis might reject café alternative option.
• Anticipating changes to the external environment will enable PGC to take
decisions to reduce risk and take advantage of opportunities.
• Analysis of how other forms of strategic analysis might guide strategic
decisions:
– Identification of weaknesses that need to be addressed when
making decisions or alternative sought, e.g. financing.
• SA will help reduce the risk of decisions taken by PGC as it will help
PGC build on their core competencies and strengths and highlight
weaknesses that need to be resolved.
• SA takes time to do in terms of management focus, reducing time
available for other tasks. 

Porter’s Five Forces: Power of buyers, suppliers, threat of substitutes,
barriers to entry and competitive rivalry helps PGC make decisions about
markets to enter and reduces risk by considering factors that affect
success.
• Relation of strategic analysis to other areas of strategic management.
• Analysis of role of SC techniques in making the decision
Evaluation
• Elements that the evaluation/judgement might depend on such as:
– PEST needs to be reviewed regularly.
– PGC operates in a dynamic environment so analysis may quickly
become outdated.
– Subjective nature of PEST analysis.
– An assessment of the importance of timing and a timescale in
carrying out analysis.
– Subjective interpretation of the models – one manager’s opinion of
PEST may be very different to another’s.
– Internal factors will influence likelihood of success e.g. resistance to
change, availability of finance, flexibility of employees.
– Strategic analysis is only as good as the information gathering
process and ability of the analyst allow.
– Good analysis is not a guarantee of successful decision making.
– Essential to have objective(s) for successful use of techniques.
– Critical comments on the techniques.
• Evaluation of other factors that influence options such as:
– Comments that PEST on its own is not enough to fully support a
decision.
– Attitude of directors
– Attitude to risk
– Need for SC techniques in making the decision
• Justification of most useful technique(s) with supporting argument.
– Ranking the usefulness of the techniques in relation to PGC’s plans.
• Weighing up importance of other stages in strategic management
especially objectives and choice techniques in relation to strategic
analysis.
• Successful analysis requires to be set in the framework of strategic
management/planning.

 

7 Evaluate the usefulness of strategic choice techniques to the directors as they consider Peter’s
proposal for PGC to open cafés.
Write the question number here

Ans:  Evaluate the usefulness of strategic choice techniques to the directors
as they consider Peter’s proposal for PGC to open cafés.
Knowledge
• Explanation of methods of strategic choice – Ansoff, Force Field
Analysis, Decision trees
• Role of investment appraisal techniques
• Quantitative v qualitative factors
• Place of strategic choice in strategic management
– Understanding of SWOT, PEST, Porter’s Five Forces and Boston
Matrix as strategic analysis techniques prior to SC.
• Role of objectives in strategic management
Application
• First objective is survival.
• New roasters and/or ERP
• Competitive market conditions
• Reference to the Force Field Analysis, diversification or identified core
competencies.
– Driving forces 13: Restraining forces 12
• Other possible choices – e.g. sell tea.
• ARR 2% Payback 4 years
• Expected monetary value of $100 000.
• Ansoff – diversification
Analysis
• Linking objective to strategic choice and management
• How techniques may be used and the advantages and disadvantages.
– Force field analysis encourages managers to consider different
aspects of a decision.
– By identifying restraining forces action can be taken to mitigate
negative effects and reduce risk.
– Visual summary of factors in a decision. Helps focus attention on the
most important forces affecting the decision. Facilitates discussion of
these points to enhance decision making.
– Forces can be weighted thus improving decision making.
– Subjective forces are objectified by giving them a weighting focusing
attention on important issues and making it easier to compare force
for and against change. 

Role of other techniques in decision making that consider the
quantitative aspects of the choices.
– Use of probabilities in decision trees therefore reducing risk for PGC
of option choice.
– ARR enables PGC to choose option with highest return which may
be important to shareholders.
• The use of techniques to analyse aspects of the options.
• Consideration of why each of the applied strategic choice methods leads
to the recommendation.
• Consideration of other information in the case and how this might relate
to the recommendation.
• Relation of choice techniques to other areas of strategic management
Evaluation
• Assessment of likelihood of success
• To what extent do the strategic choice methods results lead to Peter’s
recommendation? Is this the only possible conclusion?
• Will market conditions relating to cafes still apply in the future?
• Is the objective of survival defined enough to generate a strategic plan?
• Would more numerate objectives aid planning?
• Need to consider other options – role of Directors in choice.
• Elements that the evaluation/judgement might depend on:
– Effective integration of analysis and choice techniques will be
important.
– How accurate is the information used in the strategic choice
methods? Success may depend on this.
– Ability of the individual(s) completing the SC techniques.
– SC techniques need to be used together taking account of both
quantitative and qualitative factors.
– Weighting of the driving and restraining forces is subjective. Has
Peter manipulated the data to support his preferred outcome? Bias
and hidden agenda in formulating the analysis. Disagreements about
relative importance.
– Forces may be missed from the analysis.
– Justification of most useful choice technique with supporting
argument.
• Significance of other factors that may also be important:
– Impact of management objectives and attitudes.
– Availability of finance (these may be included in the FFA). Are
resources an issue – e.g. finance, sales staff, and capacity?
– The choice must be implemented successfully – this may require a
successful detailed business plan, management of change, training,
new employees.
– Other information that could be useful? Additional information is
essential – e.g. current and forecast rates of interest.

SOCIOLOGY 9699
Section A

2 (a) Explain two practical factors that can influence choice of research method. [8]  

Ans:

Explain two practical factors that can influence choice of research  method.  

Indicative content  

Time – often linked to money. Many methods / approaches can take  considerable time, e.g. longitudinal studies 

Money – often linked to funding source; some methods are cheap Location 

Sample issues: size, access, cooperation 

Nature of the study group, e.g. if they are easier to access, e.g. poor /  powerless groups 

Researcher’s skill set, e.g. less skill needed to administer a structured  interview than unstructured interview 

Background of the researcher, e.g. gender / age / ethnicity may limit the  possibilities of conducting covert observation 

For this question, use of sociological material is likely to be demonstrated  through reference to knowledge of any sociological method and there may  be empirical references to studies  

Reward a maximum of two practical factors. Up to 4 marks are available for  each factor:  

1 mark for making a point / giving a factor (e.g. time taken)  

1 mark for explaining that point (e.g. some research methods take much  longer to complete than others)  

1 mark for selecting relevant sociological material (e.g. covert participant  observation)  

1 mark for explaining how the material supports the point (e.g. covert  participant observation may take longer as you have to gain the trust of the  group)  

(2 4 marks) 

2(b) Explain two limitations of using an overt approach to participant observation. [6]

Ans:

Explain two limitations of using an overt approach to participant  observation.  

Indicative content  

Limitations  

Hawthorne / observer effect may influence respondent behaviour  Some may refuse to participate if they know they are being studied  Can be more difficult to gain access to the group if they know you are  studying them  

Group may not accept your involvement in certain activities  Practical: time consuming (large amount of data), can take years to  complete  

Unrepresentative – study group likely to small and haphazardly selected  Reliability problems  

Bias and lack of objectivity  

Any other appropriate limitation  

Limitations need to specifically relate to the overt aspect and not participant  observation in general  

Reward a maximum of two limitations. For each limitation, up to 3 marks  are available  

1 mark for identifying a limitation of (e.g. Hawthorne effect)  

1 mark for explaining why this method has this limitation (e.g. because  participants know they are being studied they may not act naturally)  

1 mark for explaining why it is a limitation (e.g. this reduces the validity of  the data)  

(2 3 marks) 

3(a) ‘Male identity is changing.’ 

(a) Explain this view. [10] 

Ans:

‘Male identity is changing’.  

Using sociological material, give one argument against this view.  Indicative content  

Evidence of traditional male identities persisting in work and elsewhere Continued dominance of hegemonic masculinity 

Evidence of socialisation into traditional male roles / identities Functionalism and the ‘instrumental’ male 

Evidence that new forms of masculinity are less common in some parts  of the world 

Discussion of how male identity is not uniform and can be modified by  age, class and ethnicity 

Levels of response  

Level 3: 5–6 marks  

One clear and developed argument against the view that male identity  is changing.  

Sociological material, such as concepts, theories and evidence, is used  to support the argument. The material selected is appropriate and  focused on the question with its relevance made clear.  

Level 2: 3–4 marks  

One clear but underdeveloped argument against the view that male  identity is changing.  

The material selected is appropriate but not clearly focused on the  question or its relevance to the argument is not made clear.  

Level 1: 1–2 marks  

One point disagreeing with the view that male identity is changing,  which is undeveloped or lacking clarity.  

Any supporting material lacks focus on the specific question.  

Level 0: 0 marks  

No response worthy of credit. 

3. (b) Using sociological material, give one argument against this view. [6] 

Ans:

‘Male identity is changing’.  

Using sociological material, give one argument against this view.  Indicative content  

Evidence of traditional male identities persisting in work and elsewhere Continued dominance of hegemonic masculinity 

Evidence of socialisation into traditional male roles / identities Functionalism and the ‘instrumental’ male 

Evidence that new forms of masculinity are less common in some parts  of the world 

Discussion of how male identity is not uniform and can be modified by  age, class and ethnicity 

Levels of response  

Level 3: 5–6 marks  

One clear and developed argument against the view that male identity  is changing.  

Sociological material, such as concepts, theories and evidence, is used  to support the argument. The material selected is appropriate and  focused on the question with its relevance made clear.  

Level 2: 3–4 marks  

One clear but underdeveloped argument against the view that male  identity is changing.  

The material selected is appropriate but not clearly focused on the  question or its relevance to the argument is not made clear.  

Level 1: 1–2 marks  

One point disagreeing with the view that male identity is changing,  which is undeveloped or lacking clarity.  

Any supporting material lacks focus on the specific question.  

Level 0: 0 marks  

No response worthy of credit. 

Section B

4 Evaluate cultural explanations of deviance. [26]

Ans:

Evaluate cultural explanations of deviance.  

Indicative content  

 In support In evaluation  

Points Explanations including:  

  • Social resistance  
  • Subcultures  
  • Marginalisation –  
  • Under-socialisation  

approaches that view the  

relationships between  

  • Cultural deprivation  

different groups as  

theories that focus on  

shaped by power leads  

inadequate socialisation  

to some marginalised /  

practices  

resistant groups (e.g. the  

  • Subcultural explanations  

young) being ‘labelled’  

that focus on the non 

as deviant, etc.  

conformity of some  

  • Biological / psychological  

groups (e.g. class based  

explanations for deviant  

subcultures)  

behaviour focusing on  

  • Rise in anomie /  

deficient personalities  

deviance. Growth of  

more prone to deviance  

industrial / urban  

  • Evidence of the  

societies that promote  

persistence of social  

self-interest and  

pressure promoting  

individualism leading to  

conformity (social  

greater challenges to  

exchange theory)  

traditional certainties  

  • Structural approaches  

that focus on socio 

economic factors that  

give rise to deviant /  

criminal behaviour 

Research  

 Durkheim  

evidence  

Additional  

Anomie, normlessness;  

Deterministic, dominant  

concepts  

organic / mechanical  

ideology; social exchange,  

solidarity, positive / negative  

social control, conformity,  

sanctions  

The above content is indicative and other relevant approaches to the  question should be rewarded appropriately.

 

(5). Evaluate the view that quantitative research methods have more strengths than limitations. [26]

Ans:

Evaluate the view that quantitative research methods have more  strengths than limitations.  

Indicative content  

 In support In evaluation  

Points Produce numerical data  

  • Methods unsuitable for  

enabling identification of  

study of human  

patterns / trends /  

behaviour  

comparisons  

  • Methods not objective /  
  • Methods used: surveys /  

value free  

questionnaire, structured  

  • Humans have free will  

interviews, content  

and cannot be measured  

analysis, official statistics  

  • Resulting data lacks  
  • Reliability – easily  

validity  

replicated  

  • Variables in the social  
  • Objective and value-free  

world cannot be  

  • Large scale and  

controlled  

representative samples  

  • Generalisable  
  • Practical advantages,  

e.g. computers can be  

used to analyse data.  

Research  

Durkheim, Popper; Weber  

evidence  

Additional  

Positivism, scientific  

Interpretivism, agency,  

concepts  

approach; replicable, social  

realism  

facts; hypothesis  

The above content is indicative and other relevant approaches to the  question should be rewarded appropriately.

2 (a) Explain two ways the family supports ruling class interests, according to Marxist theory. [8]

Ans:

Explain two ways the family supports ruling class interests, according  to Marxist theory.  

Indicative content  

Socialises children to become a subservient workforce  Acts as a safety valve – absorbs anger & frustration of the worker /  prevents worker from venting anger and frustration towards bosses  Ideological state apparatus / socialises into dominant ideology  Consumers for capitalism  

Form of social control  

Reproduces future workforce  

Reinforces capitalism by enforcing patriarchal dominance in the family  Ensures obedient workers due to responsibilities to the family  Monogamous marriage ensures clear lineage for handing down of  family wealth  

Any other relevant way  

For this question, use of sociological material is likely to be demonstrated  through references to Marxist sociologists e.g. Marx and Althusser and  concepts such as Ideological State Apparatus etc.  

Reward a maximum of two ways. Up to 4 marks are available for each way.  

1 mark for making a point / giving a way (e.g. children are socialised into the  idea that hierarchy and inequality are inevitable).  

1 mark for explaining that point (e.g. parental power over children teaches  them to accept there will always be someone in charge)  

1 mark for selecting relevant sociological material (e.g. Althusser /  ideological state apparatus  

1 mark for explaining how the material supports the point (e.g. as children  learn to submit to authority in the family they will submit to authority in the  workplace)  

(2 4 marks) 

2.(b) Explain one strength and one limitation of the Marxist view of the family. [6] 

Ans:

Explain one strength and one limitation of the Marxist view of the  family.  

Indicative content  

Strengths  

Identifies that the family performs an ideological role  

Highlights the exploitation that takes place in the family due to its  relationship with capitalism  

Highlights the inequalities of power that take place within the family  Provides a historical view on the development of the family  Any other appropriate strength  

Limitations  

It is too economically deterministic  

Ignores family diversity  

Does not recognise the independence of women  

Ignores the many benefits of the nuclear family to its family members  Any other appropriate limitation  

Reward a maximum of one strength. For this strength, up to 3 marks are  available:  

1 mark for identifying a strength of Marxism (e.g. Marxism identifies the  ideological role the family)  

1 mark for explaining why Marxism has this strength (e.g. they see the  family as supporting ruling class interests)  

1 mark for explaining why it is a strength (e.g. this provides a more critical  perspective of the family and its role in socialising children, than the positive  view of socialisation proposed by functionalism)  

Reward a maximum of one limitation. For this limitation, up to 3 marks are  available:  

1 mark for identifying a limitation of Marxism (e.g. Marxism is too  deterministic about the relationship between the family and capitalist  society)  

1 mark for explaining why Marxism has this limitation (e.g. it assumes  people passively accept their socialisation and family life and that their  future is pre-determined)  

1 mark for explaining why it is a limitation (e.g. people can exercise free will  and choose their own lifestyle which may not necessarily support the  interests of the ruling class)  

(2 3 marks) 

3 ‘Conjugal roles have become equal.’ 

(a) Explain this view. [10]

Ans:

‘Conjugal roles have become equal.’  

Explain this view.  

Indicative content  

  • Growth in new man/father  
  • Growth of Symmetrical family / joint conjugal roles  
  • More socially acceptable to reject traditional role expectations  Joint income/dual earner families – need to share the domestic duties  Increase in women working full time / Joint income/dual earner families  – has led to men participating more in housework  
  • Secularisation – traditional beliefs on gender roles / identities are  weakening  
  • March of progress  
  • Growth of same sex couples – more equal sharing / not abiding by  gender scripts  
  • Any other appropriate point  

Levels of response  

Level 3: 8–10 marks  

  • Good knowledge and understanding of the view that conjugal roles  have become equal. The response contains two clear and developed  points.  
  • Sociological materials such as concepts, theories and evidence, will be  used to support both points. The material selected is appropriate and  focused on the question with its relevance made clear.  

Level 2: 4–7 marks  

  • Some knowledge and understanding of the view that conjugal roles  have become equal. The response contains one clear and developed  point and one relevant but underdeveloped point.  
  • Sociological material is used to support at least one point. The material  selected is appropriate but not clearly focused on the question or its  relevance is not made clear.  

Level 1: 1–3 marks  

  • Limited knowledge and understanding of the view that conjugal roles  have become equal. The response contains one relevant but  underdeveloped point and one (or more) points related to the general  topic rather than the specific question.  
  • Any supporting material lacks focus on the specific question.  

Level 0: 0 marks  

No response worthy of credit.

 

3.(b) Using sociological material, give one argument against this view. [6]

Ans:

‘Conjugal roles have become equal.’  

Using sociological material, give one argument against this view.  Indicative content  

Oakley’s critique of Willmott and Young/Symmetrical family  Women still carry the majority burden / Dual burden/triple shift  Men’s involvement in childcare is pre-dominantly through play whilst  women’s is through care and security (Boulton / Dex)  

No evidence in modern societies of equal sharing of domestic tasks  (Knudsen and Waerness)  

As long as women’s earnings remain unequal to men’s, so too will the  division of labour in the home (Crompton)  

Religious / cultural traditions promoting gender divisions still exist  Any other appropriate point  

Levels of response  

Level 3: 5–6 marks  

One clear and developed argument against the view that conjugal roles  have become equal.  

Sociological material, such as concepts, theories and evidence, is used  to support the argument. The material selected is appropriate and  focused on the question with its relevance made clear.  

Level 2: 3–4 marks  

One clear but underdeveloped argument against the view that conjugal  roles have become equal.  

The material selected is appropriate but not clearly focused on the  question or its relevance to the argument is not made clear.  

Level 1: 1–2 marks  

One point disagreeing with the view that conjugal roles have become  equal, which is undeveloped or lacking clarity.  

Any supporting material lacks focus on the specific question.  

Level 0: 0 marks  

No response worthy of credit.

 
Section B

4 Evaluate the view that the family has lost many of its functions. [26] 

Ans:

Evaluate the view that the family has lost many of its functions.  Indicative content  

 In support Against the view  Points The functional ‘fit’ theory  

  • Fletcher and Shorter: in  

pre-industrial/early  

  • Some functions  

industrial poverty meant  

transferred to specialised  

certain functions could  

institutions e.g. schools /  

not be carried out  

education  

resulting in neglect of  

  • New Right: Changes in  

children  

family form e.g. growth of  

  • Fletcher: family now has  

lone parents can’t  

more responsibilities not  

perform some functions  

fewer e.g. health and  

  • Weakening of extended  

welfare functions are  

kinship links  

strengthened through  

  • Changing lives of women  

state  

  • Any other appropriate  
  • Marxists: important  

point  

economic function e.g.  

as unit of consumption  

  • Growth in beanpole  

families with function of  

health and welfare of the  

elderly  

  • Functions adapted not  

lost  

  • Any other appropriate  

point  

Research  

Parsons, Dennis, New Right,  

Fletcher, Shorter, Marxists  

evidence  

Murray, Willmott and Young  

Additional  

Structural differentiation,  

Capitalism, family diversity,  

concepts  

symmetrical families, New  

commercialisation of  

Man/Father, Welfare State,  

housework, pivot / sandwich  

generation,  

The above content is indicative and other relevant approaches to the  question should be rewarded appropriately. 

 

5 Evaluate the view that in contemporary society the family has become child-centred. [26]

Ans:

Evaluate the view that in contemporary society the family has become  child-centred.  

Indicative content  

 In support Against the view  Points Social construction of  

  • Age and gender  

childhood  

inequalities  

  • Legal controls  
  • March of progress view  
  • Child centred society /  
  • Toxic childhood  

welfare policies /laws  

  • Child poverty  
  • Child centred families /  
  • Disappearance of  

parenting style  

childhood  

  • Any other appropriate  
  • Cross cultural  

point  

comparisons  

  • Control of time, body and  

space  

  • Cannot be as women are  

increasingly focused on  

themselves / career  

  • Any other appropriate  

point  

Research  

Aries and Shorter,  

Hillman, Brannen, Gittins,  

evidence  

Cunningham, child welfare  

Palmer, Womack, Margo,  

policies/legal rights, Donzelot  

Postman, Child liberationists,  

Marxists/feminists  

Additional  

Infant mortality, policing of  

Age patriarchy, social control,  

concepts  

families, helicopter parenting,  

information hierarchy,  

consumerism, tiger mom,  

The above content is indicative and other relevant approaches to the  question should be rewarded appropriately. 

1 Describe two examples of how schools reflect the capitalist workplace. [4]

Ans:

Describe two examples of how schools reflect the capitalist workplace.  Indicative content  

competition for marks/promotion at work  

hierarchy in school organisation and hierarchy in the workplace  extrinsic rewards of marks/grades/qualifications and money  boredom in classroom and factory/office work  

repetitive nature of school/work  

supervision and control  

Any other relevant example  

Note:  

Reward a maximum of two examples. For each example up to 2 marks are  available:  

1 mark for identifying an example of how schools reflect the workplace.  

1 mark for showing understanding of the way this aspect of schools reflects  an aspect of the capitalist workplace.  

(2 2 marks) 

 

2 Explain two ways in which labelling can disadvantage working-class pupils. [8] 

Ans:

Explain two ways in which labelling can disadvantage working-class  pupils.  

Indicative content  

Lower teacher expectation leading to lower pupil self 

image/confidence/aspiration  

Lower streaming/banding leading to less opportunity/resources  Identification with anti-school subcultures  

Exclusion leading to amplification of deviance  

Less chance of admission by popular schools  

Any other relevant reason  

Reward a maximum of two reasons. Up to 4 marks are available for each  reason  

1 mark for making a point / identifying a reason (e.g. teachers expect less of  working class).  

1 mark for explaining that point/identifying a reason (e.g. this means they  may not encourage them to achieve more)  

1 mark for selecting relevant sociological material such as a  study/concept/theory/empirical evidence to support the point (e.g. Dunne  and Gazeley)  

1 mark for explaining how the material supports the point (e.g. Dunne and  Gazeley found that teachers “normalised” working class under-achievement  but helped middle class pupils to do better).  

(2 4 marks) 

 

3 ‘The education system reinforces value consensus in society.’  

Using sociological material, give two arguments against this view. [12]

Ans:

‘The education system reinforces value consensus in society.’ Using sociological material, give two arguments against this view.  Indicative content  

Different schools may promote different values, e.g. faith schools,  private education  

Education imposes ruling class values rather than encouraging the  sharing of common values  

Education in practice fails to instil values. Teachers and pupils have  their own perspectives, motives and choices.  

Subcultures form within the education system which have their own sets  of values  

In contemporary societies it is less clear what the core values are so it  is difficult for the education system to promote value consensus  Any other relevant argument against the view  

Reward a maximum of two arguments. Up to 6 marks are available for each  argument.  

Note:  

This question is asking for arguments against the view. There are no marks  for explaining the view or giving arguments supporting the view.  

Levels of response  

Use the following levels to mark each argument.  

Level 3: 5–6 marks  

One clear and developed argument against the view that the education  system reinforces value consensus in society. 

Sociological material, such as concepts, theories and evidence, is used  to support the argument against the view. The material selected is  appropriate and focused on the question with its relevance made clear.  

Level 2: 3–4 marks  

One clear but underdeveloped argument against the view that the  education system reinforces value consensus in society.  

The material selected is appropriate but not fully focused on the  question. Sociological evidence is used but its relevance to the  argument is not made clear.  

Level 1: 1–2 marks  

One point disagreeing with the view that the education system  reinforces value consensus in society which is undeveloped or lacking  clarity.  

Any material selected lacks focus on the specific question.  

Level 0: 0 marks  

No response worthy of credit. 

 

4 Evaluate the view that intelligence is the main factor influencing educational achievement. [26]

Ans:

Evaluate the view that intelligence is the main factor influencing  educational achievement.  

Indicative content  

 In support Against  Points Intelligence defined as  

Problems of defining and  

measuring intelligence  

general capacity to  

learn/understand/  

Change in IQ according  

achieve in education  

to class background  

IQ tests as predictors of  

Change in IQ according  

educational success.  

to stream or school  

allocation  

Meritocracy theory  

argues that as long as  

Material, cultural and  

there is equality of  

interactionist factors  

opportunity then  

leading to educational  

intelligence will have a  

underachievement.  

strong influence on  

Structural reasons for  

achievement.  

education limiting equal  

Evidence about the  

opportunity based on  

impact of different forms  

intelligence 

of intelligence:  

mathematical, spatial,  

interpersonal and  

emotional.  

Examples of where  

intelligence tests form a  

part of school selection.  

E.g. 11+ in UK, SATs in  

US.  

In support Against  

Research  

Smith-Wooley et al,  

Gardner, Flynn, Kaplan,  

evidence  

Saunders  

Murayama  

Youth Cohort Study, Hubbs 

Tait,  

Bernstein,  

Feinstein,  

DfE,  

Mortimore and Whitty,  

Sullivan,  

Douglas,  

Gillborn,  

Epstein,  

Archer 

Concepts IQ and its types, Genetics,  

Material and cultural  

Social mobility,  

deprivation,  

Meritocracy  

Cultural capital,  

Access and exclusion,  

Labelling,  

Resource allocation,  

Legitimising failure.  

The above content is indicative and other relevant approaches to the  question should be rewarded appropriately.

Section A: Globalisation

1 ‘Cultural differences are disappearing as a result of globalisation.’ Evaluate this view. [35]

Ans:

‘Cultural differences are disappearing as a result of globalisation.’  Evaluate this view.  

Key focus of the question  

The question invites consideration of whether globalisation has resulted in the  incorporation of the very different and varied people and cultures of the world  into a single globalised culture and society, or ‘global village’. Cultural  globalisation refers specifically to the idea that there is now a global common  culture transmitted and reinforced through the internet, popular entertainment  media, transnational marketing of particular brands and international travel  and tourism that goes beyond local cultural traditions and lifestyle. Answers  are likely to provide examples of global cultural products and processes  (McDonald’s, global celebrities, Nike, Hollywood, World Cup, Facebook) to  demonstrate understanding of what is meant by global culture and how it may  be displacing local cultures. Glocalisation, cultural hybridity, and cultural  defence are concepts that may be used to challenge the view that local  cultures are being replaced by a single global culture. The extent to which  global cultural forces penetrate all parts of the world equally might also be  debated in well-informed answers.  

Indicative content  

For:  

  • There is clearly a growing engagement and communication between  societies wherever they are located in the world and regardless of what  language they speak. This means that the conditions are in place for the  rapid movement of ideas, attitudes, meanings, values and cultural  products across national borders.  
  • Powerful media conglomerates have established global networks to  transmit their products to all corners of the world.  
  • Marketing of western goods has become increasingly international, with  global brands (such as Apple, Nike, McDonald’s, Coca-Cola) helping to  shape consumer tastes in many different countries.  
  • Cultural globalisation of food and diet has been particularly promoted by  American fast-food transnationals such as McDonald’s, Burger King and  KFC.  
  • Cultural icons are increasingly global celebrities, including pop stars,  sports stars, and film stars.  

Against:  

  • It can be argued that the social interaction of people from very different  cultures has produced glocalised and hybrid responses to globalisation.  Among some people and countries there is strong resistance to the  spread of global culture (for example, the growth of fundamentalist  religious movements may, in part, be a response to fears about the loss  of authentic local cultures and traditions).  

The resurgence of nationalism in many countries in recent years can also  be seen as partly a reaction to processes associated with globalisation.

The extent to which the world is characterised by cultural homogeneity  today can be questioned; there are still considerable differences between  cultures and countries, and the extent to which different parts of the world  are affected by the processes of globalisation varies (some people and  countries are more connected to global networks than others).

2 ‘Only the wealthy elites in developed countries benefit from global migration.’ Evaluate this view. [35] 

Ans:

‘Only the wealthy elites in developed countries benefit from global  migration.’ Evaluate this view.  

Key focus of the question  

The question focuses on who benefits from global migration. In particular,  does migration result in a better life for migrants or are these people exploited  to provide cheap labour and services for the benefit of the wealthy in  developed countries? While global migration may take many forms,  sociological investigation has focused mainly on migration from less  economically developed countries to richer countries in America, Europe and  some wealthier parts of Asia and the Middle East. Assimilation theory  suggests that both migrants and the societies in which they settle can benefit  from global migration if the migrants full immerse themselves into the culture  of the host society. Neoliberalists also argue that global migration has  potentially positive economic, political and cultural benefits for both receiving  and sending societies. Marxist sociologists argue that global migration only  benefits the capitalist class and the core countries at the centre of the global  capitalist system. Interactionists argue that sociologists need to examine how  migration is experienced and interpreted by the migrants. These different  theoretical perspectives are likely to form the main structure of a good answer  to the question.  

Indicative content  

For:  

There is much evidence to suggest that the vast majority of migrants  have difficult lives, often experiencing poverty, poor housing, long hours  of gruelling work, social dislocation, and prejudice from people in the host  community.  

Many migrants report a chasm between what they expected to be able to  achieve through living and working in a more economically developed  country and what the reality of being a migrant worker turns out to be.  

Marxist sociologists have drawn attention to the economic and social  benefits that wealthy elites in advanced capitalist societies derive from  global migration. Migrant workers provide a cheap pool of flexible labour  that helps to keep wages low across the economy as a whole, thereby  increasing the profits of the capitalist class. Wealthy people also benefit  from the cheap services provided by migrant workers, particularly in the  form of domestic labour (nannies, cooks, gardeners, chauffeurs, and so  on).  

Against:  

Some migrants achieve an attractive lifestyle in the country of reception  and clearly benefit from the opportunities provided to migrant workers in  the more economically developed countries.  

Political reaction against global migration in the more economically  developed countries can have a destabilising influence politically and  economically. The populist unrest that results from this is not necessarily  in the interests of the wealthy elites as it threatens the status quo and  may lead to forms of nationalism that seek to place limits on the capitalist  global economic system.  

Neoliberals argue that global migration helps to bring about economic  growth from which both receiving and sending societies benefit. 

Functionalists argue that all could benefit from global migration if only  cultural barriers to assimilation could be overcome.

Section B: Media 

3 ‘Different groups in society influence the content of the media.’ Evaluate this view. [35] 

Ans:

‘Different groups in society influence the content of the media.’ Evaluate  this view.  

Key focus of the question  

The idea that different groups in society are able to influence the content of  the media is a key component of pluralist theory. Good answers are likely to  use pluralist ideas to explain the view expressed in the question. Contrasting  perspectives will then be deployed to provide an evaluation of the pluralist  claim that control of the media is spread between different groups in society.  Marxist sociologists argue that the content of the media is controlled by the  owners of media conglomerates and, more broadly, by capitalist interests.  Interactionists would argue that only detailed study of individual instances of  where decisions are made about media content would shed light on who  controls the media and how that control is exercised. Feminist sociologists  would highlight the extent to which media content is shaped by men and  reflects male interests predominantly. Postmodernists would point out that the  new digital media has created opportunities for more people to influence  media content than was perhaps previously the case.  

Indicative content  

For:  

In democratic societies it is true that different groups have an opportunity  to shape the key institutions of society, including the media.  

There are many cases of where powerful lobby groups representing  different sections of society have been successful in influencing the  decisions taken by media organisations.  

Media organisations have an interest in reflecting the views and interests  of their audiences by providing content that people from different sections  of society want.  

Government regulations often require some or all media organisations to  operate in ways that allow scope for different groups in society to  influence media content (for example, the BBC Charter).  

Against:  

Media conglomerates operate increasingly on a global scale and,  arguably, this has made them less subject to influence by national  governments and pressure groups.  

Only some groups in society have the necessary access and skills to  influence the media; less privileged groups may lack the means to shape  media content.  

Marxist sociologists argue that capitalist interests ultimately determine the  content of the media and that different groups in society are able to  influence that content only where that is consistent with satisfying the  aims of the capitalist owners of the media.  

Considerable power is available to the media to resist and frustrate any  groups in society who seek to influence media content in ways that are  not acceptable to media owners and managers. 

4 ‘There is no clear evidence that human behaviour is influenced by the media.’ Evaluate this view. [35] 

Ans:

‘There is no clear evidence that human behaviour is influenced by the  media.’ Evaluate this view.  

Key focus of the question  

The context for this question is the debate about whether the media are able  to influence human behaviour. More specifically, the question invites  candidates to consider the quality of evidence available in assessing the  influence of the media. Answers may engage with theoretical debates about  whether behaviour is influenced by the media and a response of this kind  done well could reach the upper half of the mark range. To score highly in the  upper half of the mark range, however, answers would need to reflect on the  evidential basis for believing that the media influences behaviour. For  example, studies of the influence of the media may be reviewed and/or  candidates will consider the methodological and practical difficulties in  establishing the precise influence of the media on behaviour.  

At the theoretical level, Marxist sociologists would disagree with the view  expressed in the question. The mass manipulation model sees the media as  an extremely powerful agent of social control through disseminating ideas  favourable to the capitalist ruling class in ways that gain immediate and  uncritical acceptance from the populace. By contrast, the neo-Marxist  hegemonic model sees the influence of the media in shaping the way people  think and behave as longer-term and more indirect. Functionalist and pluralist  theories would see the media as reflecting the values and attitudes of society  more than shaping them. They would reject the idea of the media as a  monolithic force manipulating the way people think and behave. Interactionist  would point out that media content can be interpreted in different ways and  various factors affect the way particular audiences respond to the messages  transmitted by the media. Feminists would agree that the media exercise a  very powerful influence on how women see themselves and are perceived by  men, but would also note how feminists have been successful in resisting  those media influences and campaigning against negative representations of  women in the media.  

Studies that might be cited in discussing evidence about media influence  include: Bandura et al, Robert Merton, Katz and Lazarfeld, Dorothy Hobson,  David Buckingham, David Morley.  

Indicative content  

For:  

Claims that the media have a powerful impact in shaping human  behaviour are largely theoretical. These theories lack support from  extensive empirical research.  

Classic studies of media influence, such as Bandura et al, have been  heavily criticised both in terms of findings and methodological soundness.  Indeed, it is very difficult to measure both the short-term and the long term effects of exposure to media content.  

Research that has been carried out on, for example, TV soap operas,  suggests that audiences are able to distinguish between reality and  representations of reality, suggesting that media influence in this respect  is not that powerful. 

  • Audiences are not passive consumers of the media; the uses and  gratifications model of media effects notes that people actively choose  how they use the media and select content that meets their personal  needs and interests. In this view, the media are used by people to serve  pre-existing personal needs; the media doesn’t shape those needs as  such. Studies, such as those by Lull, provide empirical support for this  view.  
  • Rather than being manipulated by the media into accepting particular  ways of thinking and behaving, people often challenge media content and  seek to change the way media operators work. Examples include  campaigns against sexism in the media, the alt- right’s efforts to expose  so-called fake news among established media outlets, and the work of  the ‘underground press’ in challenging the state-controlled media in many  oppressive, authoritarian regimes.  

Against:  

  • Evidence from studies provides support for more sophisticated theories of  media influence, such as the two-step flow model and the interpretive  model. For example, the studies by Hobson and by Buckingham.  
  • The Frankfurt School highlighted some features of mass society that  create a conducive background for media manipulation of the way people  think and behave.  
  • The media dominate the flow of information in society today.  Postmodernists argue that we live in a media-saturated society in which  we are surrounded by media images and spend an increasing amount of  time each day consuming media messages.  
  • The media are heavily dependent on support from advertisers, and the  latter have an interest in manipulating consumer behaviour and more  broadly in shaping social identities in ways that support a vibrant capitalist  economy. Advertisers would be unlikely to spend such huge sums on  advertising if the media were not able to influence behaviour to a  considerable extent.  
  • Celebrities are seen as important opinion formers and role models today  and, to some extent, they can be seen as a product (an extension) of the  media.  
  • For Baudrillard, entertainment, information and communication  technologies provide experiences that are so intense and involving that  everyday life cannot compete. People’s needs and tastes are largely  shaped by the media, in this view.  
  • The way we understand the world is increasingly filtered through the  representations of reality provided by the media. In a media-saturated  society we struggle to separate representations of reality from reality.  Postmodernists refer to this phenomenon as hyperreality. 

Postmodernists claim that the media is a particularly powerful influence  on social identity, helping shape the images we project about ourselves,  the groups we identity with, and the judgements we make about others.

Section C: Religion 

5 ‘Social class is the most important factor influencing religious participation.’ Evaluate this view. [35] 

Ans:

‘Social class is the most important factor influencing religious  participation’. Evaluate this view.  

Key focus of the question  

This question invites consideration of the social factors that influence religious  participation, with particular reference to social class. Good responses will  demonstrate a sound understanding of the ways in which social class  background may influence whether or not a person engages in religious  practices. Evidence about the importance of social class as an influence on  religious participation might also feature in well-constructed responses.  Evaluation will include consideration of other social factors, apart from social  class, that may influence rates of religious participation, such as ethnicity,  age, gender, and national culture.  

For:  

Evidence about the importance of social class in influencing religious  participation.  

Marxist theories of the relationship between religion and social class.  Weber’s ideas about the links between social class and religion,  particularly his distinction between theodicy of misfortune and theodicy of  good fortune.  

Hunt’s study of the relationship between social mobility and religious  participation.  

Discussion the links between social class and particular types of religious  organisation, such as denominations and sects.  

Against:  

Shortage of detailed studies of the links between social class and  religious participation, other than in the USA.  

Social class interacts with other social divisions, particularly gender,  ethnicity and age, in shaping religious belief and participation.  There is a substantial body of evidence showing that women tend to be  more religious than men.  

Ethnicity is a significant influence on religious participation. Most  evidence suggests that members of minority ethnic groups in Western  countries are more likely than majority ethnic groups to see themselves  as religious and to participate in religious practices.  

Evidence about the influence of age on religious participation; for  example, the study by Voas and Crockett and evidence presented by  Burkimsher’s in his world survey of religious participation. 

 

6 ‘All religions are patriarchal and contribute to gender inequality.’ Evaluate this view. [35]

Ans:

‘All religions are patriarchal and contribute to gender inequality.’  Evaluate this view.  

Key focus of the question  

This question invites consideration of the relationship between religion and  patriarchy. Feminist studies highlight the way that religious organisations  contribute to gender inequality through, for example, patriarchal symbolism  and influences in theology, low involvement of women in positions of authority  in the organisation, and support for traditional gender roles in the wider  society. The feminist analysis of gender inequality in religion can be countered  in various ways, including reference to the functionalist view that women  perform different but equal roles within many religious organisations. Good  answers might consider how the position of women in religious organisations  may be changing and also how the involvement of women differs between  religions (gender inequality appears to be less pronounced in some religions  than others).  

Indicative content  

For:  

Examples of religious teachings that support a patriarchal worldview.  Evidence to show that women are lowly represented in positions of  authority within most religious organisations.  

Religious support for conservative values that emphasise traditional  gender roles for women.  

Examples of religious support for opposing causes that feminists have  campaigned for, such as abortion rights, civil marriage, and freedom from  arranged marriages.  

Against:  

Danger of over-generalising as the position of women in religion varies  greatly between different religious organisations.  

Some religions are responding positively to calls for women to have  greater opportunity to access positions of authority, including through  ordination.  

Many women with religious affiliations may support some or all of the  religious values that feminists see as patriarchal.  

The secularisation thesis suggests that religion has little social  significance today and so the influence of religion as a contributor to  gender inequality in the wider society may be very limited. 

 

PSYCHOLOGY 9990

1. From the study by Milgram (obedience):
(a) State the lowest voltage shock that was labelled on the shock generator.

Ans: State the lowest voltage shock that was labelled on the shock
generator.
1 mark for correct answer
15 (volts) 

 

(b) Describe the shock instructions the participant (teacher) was told to follow when the victim
(learner) gave an incorrect answer.

Ans: Describe the shock instructions the participant (teacher) was told to
follow when the victim (learner) gave an incorrect answer.
1 mark per correct point made
They were told to give a shock to learner each time they gave an incorrect
response;
This was done by pressing a switch/button
They were told to move one switch higher each time/increase by 15 V each
time;
They were told to say the voltage level;
Before giving that shock level; 

 

(c) Milgram suggested one reason for obedience was the payment to the participant (teacher).
Suggest one reason for obedience in this study, other than the payment.

Ans: Milgram suggested one reason for obedience was the payment to the
participant (teacher).
Suggest one reason for obedience in this study, other than the
payment.
1 mark for a suggestion based on the study
e.g.
Being in a university;
The experimenter’s prods;
The way the experimenter was dressed;
The authority figure; 

 

2 From the study by Piliavin et al. (subway Samaritans):
(a) Outline one aim of the study, other than to test the effect of race on helping behaviour.

Ans: From the study by Piliavin et al. (subway Samaritans):
Outline one aim of the study, other than to test the effect of race on
helping behaviour.
2 marks full aim
1 mark brief/partial aim
e.g.
To investigate bystander behaviour in a realistic setting/where there is a
clear view of victim (2 marks);
To investigate if a person is more likely to help an ill or drunk victim
(2 marks);
To investigate bystander behaviour (1 mark);
To investigate diffusion of responsibility (1 mark) which states that the more
people present in an emergency the less likely they are to help (1 mark);
To test the idea of a Good Samaritan (1 mark); 

 

(b) Describe one result about same-race helping in the cane (ill) condition.

Ans: Describe one result about same-race helping in the cane (ill) condition.
2 marks meaningful comparison
1 mark no comparison
e.g.
There was a slight tendency for same-race helping in this condition, but it
was not a significant result (2 marks)
Overall, people were more likely to help an ill victim of their own race
compared to a different race (2 marks)
White helpers were more likely to help a white victim compared to black
helpers (2 marks)
Black helpers were less likely to help a black victim compared to white
helpers (2 marks)
Overall, people helped out same race more often (1 mark) 

 

(c) Outline two comments made by participants who did not help the victim

Ans: Outline two comments made by participants who did not help the
victim.
1 mark per comment
‘It is for men to help him’;
‘I wish I could help him’;
‘I am not strong enough’;
‘I never saw this kind of thing before’;
‘I don’t know where to look’;
‘You feel so bad when you don’t know what to do’; 

 

3 From the study by Laney et al. (false memory):
(a) Identify three features of the sample used in Experiment 2.

Ans: From the study by Laney et al. (false memory):
Identify three features of the sample used in Experiment 2
1 mark per correct point made
n = 103;
Undergraduates;
University of Washington;
Received course credit (for participation);
Majority female;
Mean age 20 years;
Volunteers; 

 

(b) Suggest one real-world application based on the results of the study.

Ans: Suggest one real-world application based on the results of the study.
1 mark for what the application is about
1 mark for how it will be implemented/used
e.g.
The false memory procedure could be used with children who are fussy
eaters (1 mark: what); they could be led to believe that they actually like
healthy food to improve their diets (1 mark: how);
Can help children who are obese/have a poor diet (1 mark: what) by letting
parents alter their child’s diet via a false memory (1 mark: how); 

 

4 (a) Describe one assumption of the learning approach, using an example other than the study by
Pepperberg (parrot learning).

Ans: Describe one assumption of the learning approach, using an example
other than the study by Pepperberg (parrot learning).
1 mark assumption with no example
2 marks assumption with an example
e.g.
We learn through conditioning (1 mark). For operant we can get rewarded
for being good so we are likely to be good again (1 mark: example);
Social Learning helps to explain changes in behaviour (1 mark). We observe
and imitate behaviours of aggressive role models and copy that aggression
(1 mark: example);
We learn through classical conditioning (1 mark);
We learn from reinforcement/punishment (1 mark);

 

(b) (i) Explain how one finding from the study by Pepperberg supports the assumption of the
learning approach that you have described in (a).

Ans: Explain how one finding from the study by Pepperberg supports the
assumption of the learning approach that you have described in (a).
1 mark for finding
1 mark for linking it to an assumption highlighted in 4(a). If it does not match
assumption can still gain 1 mark for a correct result.
e.g.
Alex scored well above chance on tests for same/different with familiar
objects (76.6%) (1 mark: finding). This maybe because he was rewarded
(conditioned) during training/testing (1 mark: link);
Alex was able to comprehend same/different (1 mark: finding) after
observing a teacher and competing using the model/rival technique (1 mark:
link);
He could imitate words for colour/shape (1 mark: finding);
He was taught using the model/rival technique that uses positive
reinforcement to motivate (1 mark: link);

 

(ii) Explain how one finding from the study by Pepperberg does not support the assumption
of the learning approach that you have described in (a).

Ans: Explain how one finding from the study by Pepperberg does not
support the assumption of the learning approach that you have
described in (a).
1 mark for finding
1 mark for explaining why there is no link to an assumption highlighted in
4(a). If it does not match assumption can still gain 1 mark for a correct
result.
e.g.
Alex scored well above chance on tests of same/different with novel objects
(82.3%) (1 mark: finding). He had not been conditioned/rewarded to know
these differences/was only rewarded after he got the answer correct (so this
cannot explain why he was good at these) (1 mark: explain) 

 

5 From the study by Saavedra and Silverman (button phobia):
(a) During diagnosis, the boy did not meet the DSM-IV criteria for one disorder.
Name this disorder

Ans: From the study by Saavedra and Silverman (button phobia):
During diagnosis, the boy did not meet the DSM-IV criteria for one
disorder. Name this disorder.
1 mark for correct answer
OCD/Obsessive Compulsive Disorder 

 

(b) Describe the Feelings Thermometer.

Ans: Describe the Feelings Thermometer.
1 mark per correct point made
A hierarchy of disgust/fear;
Nine point scale/0–8;
0 = no distress/8 = very distressed;
Used to rate his level of disgust/fear/distress/anxiety; 

 

(c) Outline one strength of this study.

Ans: Outline one strength of this study.
1 mark for identifying the strength
1 mark for relating it to the Saavedra and Silverman study
e.g.
There was a standardised procedure to the study to aid replicability/
reliability (1 mark); for example, the treatment session lengths were 20 mins
for the boy (1 mark);
The study could be said to have high ecological validity (1 mark); This is
because the therapy sessions were ‘real’, and the activities would happen in
real life (1 mark);
The study followed the ethical guideline of informed consent (1 mark); as
both the mum and boy gave this and knew exactly what the therapy was
about (1 mark);

 

6 Describe the procedure from the study by Bandura et al. (aggression) from when a participant
entered the experimental room until the model began to assemble tinker toys.

Ans: Describe the procedure from the study by Bandura et al. (aggression)
from when a participant entered the experimental room until the model
began to assemble tinker toys.
1 mark per correct procedural point
The participant was taken to one corner of the room;
It was a structured play area;
The child was seated (at a table);
The experimenter demonstrated to the child how to make pictures/potato
prints/use stickers;
Once the child began ‘playing’, the experimenter took the model to the
opposite corner;
A variety of objects were located there (e.g. mallet, Bobo etc.);
The experimenter explained that these were for the model to play with;
The model was seated at their own table;
The experimenter then left the room; 

 

7 From the study by Baron-Cohen et al. (eyes test):
(a) Describe the procedure used to select the target words and foils before the main study

Ans: From the study by Baron-Cohen et al. (eyes test):
Describe the procedure used to select the target words and foils
before the main study.
1 mark per correct statement made
Piloted on a group of eight judges;
At least five from the eight had to agree that the target word was most
suitable;
No more than two judges had to pick a single foil;
Items that failed had new target words generated/was re-piloted with new
words;

 

(b) Group 1 consisted of 15 adults recruited using adverts in a specialist magazine.
Identify three other characteristics of Group 1.

Ans: Group 1 consisted of 15 adults recruited using adverts in a specialist
magazine.
Identify three other characteristics of Group 1.
1 mark per characteristic
(all) male;
(diagnosed) with AS/HFA;
Mean age of 29.7 (years);
Normal range IQ/mean IQ = 115;
Same socioeconomic classes as Group 2;
Same educational levels as Group 2; 

 

8 (a) Research has shown that males’ brains respond to positive imagery more than females’
brains.
Explain two ways the study by Canli et al. (brain scans and emotions) differs from this
research.

Ans: Research has shown that males’ brains respond to positive imagery
more than females’ brains.
Explain two ways the study by Canli et al. (brain scans and emotions)
differs from this research.
1 mark for identifying a difference
1 mark for describing the element of the study supporting the difference
e.g.
The participants in the Canli study were not male (1 mark: identifying) as
they were all female (1 mark: describing)
The Canli study did not investigate positive imagery (1 mark: identifying) as
the images ranged from negative to neutral (1 mark: describing)
The sample was different (1 mark: identifying) Canli only used females in
their study (1 mark: describing) 

 

(b) Explain one similarity and one difference between the study by Canli et al. (brain scans and
emotions) and one other core study from the biological approach.

Ans: Explain one similarity and one difference between the study by Canli et
al. (brain scans and emotions) and one other core study from the
biological approach.
4 marks available for the similarity
4 marks available for the difference
Creditworthy points include: sample/sampling, ethics, quantitative data,
brain measurement techniques. There are others.
e.g. difference
4 marks
Canli used an FMRI scan to be able to see brain activity whilst the
participants watched the different emotional scenes. Dement and Kleitman
used a different technique called an EEG that could only monitor brain wave
activity/patterns during sleep/dreaming.
3 marks
Canli used an FMRI scan to be able to see brain activity whilst the
participants watched the different emotional scenes. Dement and Kleitman
used a different technique called an EEG.
2 marks
Canli used an FMRI scan measure brain activity whilst Dement and
Kleitman used an EEG.
1 marks
Both studies used different techniques to measure brain activity. 

 

9 Evaluate the study by Yamamoto et al. (chimpanzee helping) in terms of two strengths and two
weaknesses. At least one of your evaluation points must be about the use of quantitative data.

Ans: Evaluate the study by Yamamoto et al. (chimpanzee helping) in terms
of two strengths and two weaknesses. At least one of your evaluation
points must be about the use of quantitative data.
Suitable strengths include:
quantitative data, internal validity, reliability, ethics
Suitable weaknesses include:
quantitative data, external validity, generalisability, ethics
Level 4 (8–10 marks)
• Evaluation is comprehensive.
• Answer demonstrates evidence of careful planning, organisation and
selection of material.
• Analysis (valid conclusions that effectively summarise issues and
arguments) is evident throughout.
• Answer demonstrates an excellent understanding of the material.
Level 3 (6–7 marks)
• Evaluation is good.
• Answer demonstrates some planning and is well organised.
• Analysis is often evident but may not be consistently applied.
• Answer demonstrates a good understanding of the material.
Level 2 (4–5 marks)
• Evaluation is mostly appropriate but limited.
• Answer demonstrates limited organisation or lacks clarity.
• Analysis is limited.
• Answer lacks consistent levels of detail and demonstrates a limited
understanding of the material.
Level 1 (1–3 marks)
• Evaluation is basic.
• Answer demonstrates little organisation.
• There is little or no evidence of analysis.
• Answer does not demonstrate understanding of the material.
Level 0 (0 marks)
No response worthy of credit. 

Section A
Answer all questions in this section.
1 In the study by Pepperberg (parrot learning), several features of the procedure helped to improve
reliability.
(a) State what is meant by ‘reliability’.

Ans: State what is meant by ‘reliability’.
1 mark for definition
The consistency of a procedure/task/measure;
whether the procedure/task/measure produces the same results with the
same people each time (it is used);
• reliability is about consistency = 1 mark
• to be reliable, measures must measure the phenomenon in the same
way each time = 1 mark
• whether a test produces the same results every time = 0 marks

 

(b) Suggest how one feature of the procedure helped to make this study reliable

Ans: Suggest how one feature of the procedure helped to make this study
reliable.
1 mark for feature that helped reliability
1 mark for link
standardised (questions)/question all equally hard; (feature)
the questions asked were always phrased ‘what’s same?’ or ‘what’s
different?’; (link)
There was no risk of improvement within a test; (feature)
because the same materials were never presented again during a test; (link)
only (very) specific responses were accepted as correct; (feature)
e.g. ‘colour’/‘shape’/‘mah mah’ for ‘matter’; (link)
Alex could not guess; (feature)
because his ‘first trial’ performance was measured; (link) 

 

2 In the study by Andrade (doodling), one possible uncontrolled variable was whether the participants
had friends with the same names as the people in the mock telephone call.
(a) Suggest one problem this uncontrolled variable might have caused.

Ans: Suggest one problem this uncontrolled variable might have caused.
1 mark for problem
1 mark for a detail
One point must be linked for full 2 marks
Lowers validity; (generic problem)
as people with friends of the same name will recall better; (linked detail)
means Andrade could not be certain that differences were caused by the IV;
(generic problem)
so it is not the effect of the doodling; (linked detail) 

 

(b) Suggest how the problem you referred to in (a) could be solved.

Ans: Suggest how the problem you referred to (a) could be solved.
1 mark for solution
1 mark for a detail
One point must be linked for full 2 marks
Ask people to name their friends; (linked solution)
(at least a week) prior to the study/ask friends of the participants to name all
their friends; (generic detail)
Eliminate people with friends of the same name; (linked solution)
by interviewing them after the study; (generic detail)
Use really unusual/made up names in the mock telephone call; (linked
solution)
so that it is unlikely that anyone will have friends with those names; (linked
detail)
use another feature than names; (linked solution)
e.g. use food names (of party foods); (linked solution) 

 

3 (a) State what is meant by a ‘case study’.

Ans: State what is meant by a ‘case study’.
1 mark for each (of two) descriptive points (definitive)
one instance/one person/one individual/one unit;
in detail/depth/descriptive/(lots of) qualitative data;
Do not accept ‘lots of data’ – all methods collect lots of data 

 

(b) One type of colour blindness is when people cannot tell the difference between the colours
red and green.
Describe how a case study to investigate colour blindness could be conducted.

Ans: One type of colour blindness is when people cannot tell the difference
between the colours red and green.
Describe how a case study to investigate colour blindness could be
conducted.
3 marks for three points on how to conduct the study
1 point must be directly linked to earn full 3 marks
Use volunteer sampling to obtain a colour blind person; (link)
advertise for colour blind people online; (link)
Conduct interviews; (generic)
to ask detailed questions about their past, e.g. how they found out that
sensory experience was different; (link)
Present them with coloured stimuli and ask them what they see; (link)
Make observations; (generic)
e.g. see what colour they say when see they red/green objects around
them; (link) 

 

4 In the study by Yamamoto et al. (chimpanzee helping), quantitative data was collected.
Suggest one strength of collecting quantitative data in this study.

Ans: In the study by Yamamoto et al. (chimpanzee helping), quantitative
data was collected.
Suggest one strength of collecting quantitative data in this study.
1 mark for identifying strength (can be generic)
1 mark for link
it is objective/it is not subjective/it does not require interpretation =
1 (advantage)
so the measure of helping by each chimp will be consistent/reliable = 2nd
mark link
it is numerical = 1 (advantage)
so helping scores can be easily compared/analysed/are more valid = 2nd
mark link 

 

5 Explain one weakness of random sampling.

Ans: Explain one weakness of random sampling.
1 mark for weakness
1 mark for detail
It is limited by the population chosen;
a random sample of students of one school may not be representative of all
schools;
It is limited by access to the population;
randomly selected people can be asked to participate, but some may not
(and if similar, this causes bias); 

 

6 Describe structured observations and unstructured observations, using any examples.

Ans: Describe structured observations and unstructured observations,
using any examples.
Definitions/detail: up to a maximum of 4 marks for each observational
technique.
Examples: maximum of 2 marks for each technique.
Examples can include examples from any studies (core studies, other
studies, candidate’s own studies).
Max 4 if no examples
A structured observation records a limited range of behaviours; which must
be listed/defined; (definition)
Detail:
• structured observations use behaviour checklists;
• so it is more reliable than unstructured observation;
• they collect quantitative data;
• they can be used as a technique to measure the DV in experiments;
examples:
• Piliavin et al. help/not help;
• Bandura et al. specific aggressive/non-aggressive actions/verbal
responses;
An unstructured observation records all behaviours; (definition)
Detail:
• Unstructured observations are often pilot studies;
• And may collect qualitative data (and quantitative data);
• Used to refine the range of behaviours for further study;
• to identify/define behavioural categories to record;
examples:
• Milgram responses when giving shocks;
• Pepperberg Alex’s actions when ‘bored’;
• Yamamoto et al. additional behaviour, e.g. peeping through hole;
• Schachter and Singer responses to stooges;

 

Section B
Answer all questions in this section.
7 Kira is conducting a correlational study looking for a relationship between level of creativity and
the amount of time spent playing sport. Kira could find a positive or a negative correlation.
(a) State whether Kira should use a directional or a non-directional hypothesis. Include a reason
for your answer

Ans: State whether Kira should use a directional or a non-directional
hypothesis. Include a reason for your answer.
1 mark for explanation of why it should be non-directional
(no marks for just stating non-directional)
non-directional because she does not know whether there will be a positive
or a negative correlation; 

 

(b) State what Kira would find if there was a negative correlation

Ans: State what Kira would find if there was a negative correlation.
1 mark for explanation
As the amount of creativity went up, the amount of time spent playing sport
would go down; ORA 

 

(c) Write a null hypothesis for Kira’s study.

Ans: Write a null hypothesis for Kira’s study.
1 mark for a correlational null hypothesis
It must include both variables. Hypothesis does not have to be
operationalised.
There will be no correlation/link/relationship between time spent playing
sport and (level of) creativity;
Any correlation/link/relationship between time spent playing sport and (level
of) creativity is due to chance;
Experimental hypotheses (or statements that are not hypotheses) = 0 marks
e.g. There will be no difference between creativity in people who spent a
little and a lot of time spent playing sport = 0
e.g. There will be no difference between creativity and time spent playing
sport = 0 marks
e.g. Any difference between time spent playing sport and creativity is due to
chance = 0 marks
Alternative hypotheses = 0 marks
There will be a correlation/link/relationship between time spent playing sport
and (level) of creativity; = 0 

 

(d) Kira finds a strong correlation.
Explain whether Kira will know if one variable is causing the change in the other variable.

Ans: Kira finds a strong correlation.
Explain whether Kira will know if one variable is causing the change in
the other variable.
1 mark for explaining why not (no marks for just ‘no’)
1 mark for link
No, because a correlation cannot demonstrate a causal relationship;
(generic why)
So creativity could cause people to play more sport or playing more sport
could reduce creativity; (link)
No, because a third factor could cause the change in both variables;
(generic why)
e.g. schooling could cause both an increase in creativity and less time spent
playing sport; (link) 

 

8 Ruth is planning an interview to investigate the emotional effect of being a wedding guest.
(a) Suggest one open question that Ruth could ask about the emotional effect of being a wedding
guest.

Ans: Suggest one open question that Ruth could ask about the emotional
effect of being a wedding guest.
1 mark for an open question about emotions
Describe how being a wedding guest makes you feel;
Describe what emotions you experience when you see a wedding party;
Why does being a wedding guest make you happy? 

 

(b) Suggest one closed question that Ruth could ask about the emotional effect of being a
wedding guest.

Ans: Suggest one closed question that Ruth could ask about the emotional
effect of being a wedding guest.
1 mark for a closed question about emotions with answer choices
Rate how you feel when you are a wedding guest on a scale of 1 (not
happy) to 1 (very happy);
When you see a wedding party do you feel happy/sad/jealous/indifferent?
yes/no; 

 

(c) Explain how Ruth could ensure her procedure is ethical

Ans: Explain how Ruth could ensure her procedure is ethical.
1 mark for identification of what Ruth could do to ensure ethical procedure
2 marks for further detail, 1 mark per point
For full 3 marks, at least one point should be linked
Enable participants to give informed consent; (identification of generic point)
So they would know that they might be asked about weddings; (linked
detail)
So single people could choose not to participate if they didn’t want to;
(linked detail)
Debrief participants afterwards; (identification of generic)
So any harm done could be reversed; (generic detail)
So divorced participants could be reassured to return them to their previous
state; (linked detail)
Give wedding guests the right to withdraw; (linked identification)
So if they were upset by a question they could ignore it; (generic detail)
So that people were not harmed; (generic detail)
Invading privacy; (identification of generic point) 

 

9 Jabir is investigating the social lives of old people and is using a questionnaire to measure their
friendships.
(a) Jabir will use volunteer sampling but also wants to make his sample representative of old
people.
(i) Jabir has identified three features of old people that are relevant to his study:
• whether they live alone or not
• whether they belong to any group or club
• their exact age.
Suggest why each of these features is relevant to Jabir’s study.

Ans: Jabir has identified three features of old people that are relevant to his
study:
• whether they live alone or not
• whether they belong to any group or club
• their exact age.
Suggest why each of these features is relevant to Jabir’s study.
1 mark per linked explanation ×3
whether they live alone or not:
people in care homes are surrounded by people they might call ‘friends’;
people living alone are more likely to have known the people nearby for
years, so call them friends;
older people who had more friends when they were young might be more
likely to opt for a care home (so look like they have more friends in old age);
whether they belong to any group or club:
People with sources of people from groups (e.g. religious, clubs, sports)
may appear to have more friends;
older people who had more friends when they were young may be more
likely to join things (so look like they have more friends in old age);
their exact age:
Older people’s friends might be dying more (so they would have fewer);
Older people might have vision/hearing/mobility problems (so may be less
able to maintain friendships); 

 

(ii) Describe how Jabir could use volunteer sampling to obtain a sample.

Ans: Describe how Jabir could use volunteer sampling to obtain a sample.
1 mark for each identification/detail point about how to obtain a volunteer
sample.
For full 3 marks, at least one point should be linked to Jabir’s study.
Place adverts (in a newspaper/on the internet); (generic identification)
In old people’s homes; (linked identification)
on internet sites for old people/dementia/arthritis; (linked detail)
Ask for volunteers for a study on friendships/deceive them about the aim;
(generic detail) 

 

(iii) Outline one reason why Jabir may exclude some old people from his sample.

Ans: Outline one reason why Jabir may exclude some old people from his
sample.
1 mark for reason (explained, not identified)
If they are deaf/blind/disabled as it may be hard for them to maintain
friendships;
If they are unwell/recently bereaved as it might be distressing for them;
If they have memory problems so are unable to accurately recall their
friendships;
If they have no family so have greater need of friends;
If they have a large, close family so have no need for friends; 

 

(b) Suggest how Jabir could define the variable of ‘friendship’ in his study

Ans: Suggest how Jabir could define the variable of ‘friendship’ in his
study.
1 mark for a basic operationalisation
1 mark for detail
Having a person you can talk to;
Somebody who helps you/who you help;
Who you have known for more than X months/years;
Who you trust;
Who you would confide in;
Who you see/talk to/communicate with regularly;
Who is not a member of your family; 

 

(c) Jabir intends to collect all of his data in two days.
Suggest one reason why this may reduce the validity of his findings.

Ans: Jabir intends to collect all of his data in two days.
Suggest one reason why this may reduce the validity of his findings.
1 mark for the reason why
1 mark for the effect on the validity of Jabir’s study
Must be linked to Jabir’s study for 2 marks
Deciding if someone is a friend may depend on whether you have
seen/spoken to them recently; (why)
So the measure would be of recent contact not friendships; (effect)
If you feel lonely on the day you are tested you may not be able to
remember any friends at all; (why)
So the measure would be of immediate feelings not friendships; (effect)
Old people may not remember so may need more time to think of their
friends; (why)
So the measure would be of recall ability not friendships; (effect)
Short of time/rushed; (why)
because all the old people might sleep all afternoon so he could only collect
data in two mornings; (effect)
some of the old people might be busy those two days; (why)
so he would have a limited/biased sample; (effect)
No time to interpret = 0 (irrelevant because about analysis of data not
collection) 

 

(d) Explain one weakness of using a questionnaire for Jabir’s study.

Ans: Suggest one weakness of using a questionnaire for Jabir’s study.
3 marks for suggested weakness.
For full 3 marks, answer must be linked to Jabir’s study.
Old people may have difficulty reading/concentrating; (link)
So they may appear to have fewer friends; (link)
Which reduces validity; (generic)
People may not return questionnaires; (generic)
So the overall number of participants could be low; (generic)
So would not reflect the variability of friendships in old people, lowering
generalisability; (link)
Some types of people may be less likely to return questionnaires; (generic)
e.g. people with lots of friends might be too busy to send them back; (link)
Which would create bias in the data; (generic)
Because the respondents might lie/They might give socially desirable
answers; (generic)
To hide the fact they have no friends; (link)
So it would reduce validity/so it would look like old people have more friends
than they really do; 

 

Section C
Answer all questions in this section.
10 Nuan wants to test the idea that the way words are presented affects recall. She predicts that
people will recall more words from a list they hear than from a list they see.
(a) Describe how Nuan could conduct a laboratory experiment to test the idea that the way words
are presented affects recall.

Ans: Describe how Nuan could conduct a laboratory experiment to test the
idea that the way words are presented affects recall.
Three majors for a laboratory experiment are:
What: – will be recorded, i.e. DV recall of the list (operationalisation: scoring)
How: – IV hearing or seeing a list (operationalisation: how it is presented
visually and orally)
– controls (e.g. limiting distractions, time allowed to study list)
The minors are:
• where – location of participants when data is collected (i.e. lab)
• who – participants
Other details for replication:
• experimental design (any are appropriate here)
• sampling technique
• sample size
• description of how data will analysed, e.g. use of measures of central
tendency and spread, bar charts
• ethical issues
Other appropriate responses should also be credited.
Mark according to the levels of response criteria below:
Level 3 (8–10 marks)
• Response is described in sufficient detail to be replicable.
• Response may have a minor omission.
• Use of psychological terminology is accurate and comprehensive.
Level 2 (5–7 marks)
• Response is in some detail.
• Response has minor omission(s).
• Use of psychological terminology is accurate.
Level 1 (1–4 marks)
• Response is basic in detail.
• Response has major omission(s).
• If response is impossible to conduct max. 2.
• Use of psychological terminology is mainly accurate.
Level 0 (0 marks)
No response worthy of credit.

 

(b) Identify one practical weakness/limitation with the procedure you have described in your
answer to part (a) and suggest how your study might be done differently to overcome the
problem.
Do not refer to ethics or sampling in your answer.

Ans: Identify one practical weakness/limitation with the procedure you have
described in your answer to part (a) and suggest how your study might
be done differently to overcome the problem.
Do not refer to ethics or sampling in your answer.
Answer will depend on problem identified.
Problems may, for example, be matters of:
Validity
• operationalisation
• situational/participant variables factors
Reliability
• inter-rater consistency
• intra-rater consistency.
This list is not exhaustive and other appropriate responses should also be
credited.
Marks Comment
3–4 Appropriate problem identified.
Appropriate solution is clearly described.
2 Appropriate problem identified.
plus
EITHER
Explanation of why it is a problem
OR
Ineffectual but possible solution described.
1 Appropriate problem identified.
Little or no justification.
0 No response worthy of credit 

Psychology and abnormality
Answer all questions.
1 (a) Explain what is meant by ‘systematic desensitisation’. [2]

Ans: Explain what is meant by ‘systematic desensitisation’.
Award 1 mark for a basic explanation of the term/concept.
Award 2 marks for a detailed explanation of the term/concept.
For example –
Gradual exposure therapy.(1) The patient is taught relaxation techniques (1)
and are gradually exposed to increasing levels of the object/situation they
have a phobia of until their phobic reaction subsides. (1)
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(b) Describe the cognitive explanation of phobias. [4]

Ans: Describe the cognitive explanation of phobias.
Award 1–2 marks for a basic answer with some understanding of the topic
area.
Award 3–4 marks for a detailed answer with clear understanding of the topic
area.
For example –
A phobia may develop due to irrational thoughts.(1) The person believes that
the phobic object/situation as more dangerous or harmful than the object/
situation really is.(1) Due to these thoughts, when the person sees the object
they will have a strong fear reaction.(1) These irrational thoughts could have
developed from a bad experience (e.g. being bitten by a dog) and the
irrational belief that this is likely to happen again in the future.(1)
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(c) Explain two strengths of the cognitive explanation of phobias. [6]

Ans: Explain two strengths of the cognitive explanation of phobias.
Likely strengths include –
• Backed up by evidence from the DiNardo study. DiNardo found that dog
phobia was more common in people who had a fearful experience with a
dog and also believed that this was likely to happen again in the future.
This evidence supports the explanation as it shows how people with
phobias will have irrational thoughts (‘I will be bitten again by a dog’)
compared to those people who had the bad experience but did not
believe it would happen again in the future. This increases the validity of
the cognitive explanation of phobias.
• DiNardo is supporting evidence. Credit strengths of this study (e.g.
validity, in depth data from interview, etc.). Level 3 can only be awarded
when the evaluation is clearly linked back to the explanation e.g. One
strength of this explanation is that it is backed up by evidence from the
DiNardo study which collected both quantitative and qualitative data. This
data allowed comparisons to be made between the fearful and non-fearful
participants as well as DiNardo collecting data on the dog experience and
likelihood of a bad experience happening again. This adds to the validity
of the cognitive explanation as the results which back up this explanation
are highly detailed.
• Practical applications – CBT is a useful application of this explanation.
Can challenge the irrational thoughts the patient has of the phobic object
or situation. Also shows that a traumatic experience in the past may have
led to the irrational thoughts developing and the CBT therapist can
discuss this with their client.
• Somewhat holistic as this explanation takes into account both the
experience of the phobic object/situation as well as the person’s
cognitions about the phobic object. The person thinks that there is a high
likelihood that the bad experience they had will happen again in the
future.
Mark according to the levels of response criteria below:
Level 3 (5–6 marks)
• Candidates will show a clear understanding of the question and will
explain two strengths.
• Candidates will provide a good explanation with clear detail.
Level 2 (3–4 marks)
• Candidates will show an understanding of the question and will explain
one appropriate strength in detail OR two strengths in less detail.
Level 1 (1–2 marks)
• Candidates will show a basic understanding of the question and will
attempt an explanation of a strengths. They could include two strengths
but just as an attempt.
• Candidates will provide a limited explanation.
Level 0 (0 marks)
No response worthy of credit.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

2 (a) Describe the treatment and management of obsessive-compulsive and related disorders. [8]

Ans: Describe the treatment and management of obsessive-compulsive and
related disorders.
Treatment and management of obsessive-compulsive and related disorders,
including the following:
• Biomedical (SSRIs)
• Psychological: cognitive (Lovell et al., 2006), and exposure response
prevention (Lehmkuhl et al., 2008)
Biomedical (SSRIs)
The main medications prescribed are selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors
(SSRIs). These can help improve OCD symptoms by increasing the levels of
a chemical called serotonin in the brain. This seems to then cause a lessening
of anxiety experienced by the patient and therefore they do not need to
engage in the OCD behaviours in order to relieve their anxiety (such as hand
washing).
Cognitive (Lovell et al., 2006)
Study – Comparing telephone versus face-to-face treatment of CBT for OCD.
72 out-patients took part. 10 weekly sessions of exposure and response
prevention therapy were given. 3 depression inventories given during therapy
(Yale-Brown, Beck and client satisfaction). No significant differences found at
six months. Concluded both face-to-face and telephone treatment are equally
as effective in treating OCD.
Credit can also be given for describing CBT therapy as it might be used to
reduce OCD symptoms e.g. challenging the faulty thinking that hands need to
be washed excessively in order to remove dirt and germs and keep the
person safe from harm.
Exposure response prevention (Lehmkuhl et al., 2008)
Case study with a 12-year-old boy called Jason who had both autism and
OCD. 10 50-minute sessions of CBT over 16 weeks. Used exposure response
prevention – for example –
Exposure – getting Jason to touch objects he has difficulties with such as
elevator buttons, door handles, etc.
Response prevention – reducing the anxious response to the objects by using
coping statements. Jason does have high anxiety responses but he learns as
therapy progresses that these reduce quickly within a few minutes.
After therapy score on Y-BOCS dropped from 18 to 3.
Mark according to the levels of response descriptors in Table A.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(b) Evaluate the treatment and management of obsessive-compulsive and related disorders,
including a discussion about determinism versus free-will. [10]

Ans: Evaluate the treatment and management of obsessive-compulsive and
related disorders, including a discussion about determinism versus
free-will.
A range of issues could be used for evaluation here. These include:
• Named issue – determinism/free will
nature of the treatments e.g. biomedical is more deterministic as it
suggests that the release of serotonin is what will reduce the OCD
symptoms due to the reduction in anxiety and it is not down to anything
the patient might do or think. However, it is the free will of the patient to
take the SSRI. On the other hand, the psychological treatments suggest
more free will as the patient can choose to go away and practice the
tasks set by the therapist. They do, however, need the therapist’s insight
into their thoughts and behaviours which is somewhat more deterministic.
• Validity
• Application of psychology to everyday life (with reference to treatments).
• Nature versus nurture debate with reference to the various treatments
(via the approaches upon which they are based)
• Comparisons of different treatments
• Reductionist nature of the treatments
• Appropriateness of treatments
• Cost of treatments
• Ethics of psychological treatments
Mark according to the levels of response descriptors in Table B.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

Psychology and consumer behaviour
Answer all questions.
3 (a) Explain what is meant by ‘effective slogans’ in advertising. [2]

Ans: Explain what is meant by ‘effective slogans’ in advertising.
Award 1 mark for a basic explanation of the term/concept.
Award 2 marks for a detailed explanation of the term/concept.
For example:
A striking/memorable phrase used in advertising. E.g. ‘Just Do It.’ What
makes it effective is the consumer can link the slogan to the brand. E.g. ‘Just
Do It’ is Nike.
Response needs to identify what makes a slogan effective in order to achieve
full marks.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(b) Describe the study by Fischer et al. (1991) on brand recognition in advertising. [4]

Ans: Describe the study by Fischer et al. (1991) on brand recognition in
advertising.
Award 1–2 marks for a basic answer with some understanding of the topic
area.
Award 3–4 marks for a detailed answer with clear understanding of the topic
area.
For example:
229 children from Georgia, USA attending pre-school were tested. (1)
Matched logos with one of 23 products pictured on a game board.(1) 22 logos
tested including children’s, adults’ and those of two cigarette brands (5
cigarette logos/types). (1) Found children had high rates of logo
recognition.(1) Recognition rates were highest for the Disney Channel and
Old Joe (cartoon character promoting Camel cigarettes).(1) Concluded that
very young children see, understand and remember advertising. (1) Given
serious health consequences of smoking exposure to tobacco advertising
may represent a health risk.(1)
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(c) Discuss the use of children as participants in the study by Fischer et al. [6]

Ans: Discuss the use of children as participants in the study by Fischer et al.
Points could include:
+ Can indicate issues regarding exposure of advertising of cigarettes to young
children as the study found the children remembered this advertising.
+/– can be ethical when the parents of children are asked for consent (and
signed a consent form) and the study is not harmful. In this study, the
participants played a game which is not harmful and the parents gave
consent. Could be considered unethical as the children were shown tobacco
brand logos, although this is just an image and the researchers were not
trying to advertise cigarettes to the children.
+/– Children can have low levels of concentration in psychological research,
although Fischer et al. took this in account by having the children do a game
for their study.
+/– Language/communication issues. This was overcome in the Fischer et al.
study as the children just had to do matching. But this does mean the children
could not explain their responses. It may have been a lucky guess.
– Can’t generalise to adults. Although the children may recognise the brand it
does not mean this recognition will continue into adulthood.
Mark according to the levels of response criteria below:
Level 3 (5–6 marks)
• Candidates will show a clear understanding of the question and will
discuss at least two points regarding children.
• Candidates will provide a good explanation with clear detail.
Level 2 (3–4 marks)
• Candidates will show an understanding of the question and will discuss
one point about children in detail or two or more in less detail.
• Candidates will provide a good explanation.
Level 1 (1–2 marks)
• Candidates will show a basic understanding of the question and will
attempt a discussion about children.
• Candidates will provide a limited explanation.
Level 0 (0 marks)
No response worthy of credit.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

4 (a) Describe what psychologists have discovered about intuitive thinking and its imperfections in
consumer decision-making (thinking fast and thinking slow, choice blindness, advertising and
false memory). [8]

Ans: Describe what psychologists have discovered about intuitive thinking
and its imperfections in consumer decision-making (thinking fast and
thinking slow, choice blindness, advertising and false memory).
Intuitive thinking and is imperfections in consumer-decision making, including
the following:
• thinking fast and thinking slow/system 1 and system 2 (Shleifer, 2012)
• choice blindness (Hall et al., 2010)
• advertising and false memory (Braun-LaTour et al., 2004)
Thinking fast and thinking slow/system 1 and system 2 (Shleifer, 2012)
System 1 involves thinking fast. System 1 thinking is emotional, automatic,
unconscious and effortless. Questions are answered quickly. This usually
involves quick decision making for everyday products (e.g. milk and bread).
System 2 involves thinking slow. System 2 thinking is calculating, conscious,
slow, controlled, effortful and deliberate. This type of thinking is done by
consumers buying more expensive items (such as a car or a house).
Choice blindness (Hall et al., 2010)
Took place in a supermarket in Sweden with 180 customers. Participants
were asked to taste jam and tea to decide which they preferred out of a pair.
Given jam/tea to taste (jam) or smell (tea) and rated it on a 1–10 scale. Given
second taste/smell and the jam/tea has been switched to a different
flavour/scent while the participant is distracted by one of the experimenters.
They then tasted/smelled the item and rated on 10-point scale. Then asked
which alternative they preferred and asked to sample a second time. Results
– 33% of manipulated jam trials were detected (32% of tea). Detected more
frequently in the least similar pairs for jam e.g. Cinnamon Apple vs Grapefruitbut not tea compared with the most similar pairs. Concluded there was
considerable choice blindness.
Advertising and false memory (Braun-LaTour et al., 2004)
Study 1 – Lab study with 66 undergraduates assigned to either a truthful
(shaking hands with Mickey Mouse) or a false advertisement condition
(shaking hands with Bugs Bunny). Rated attitude, affect and likelihood of
visiting Disneyland in the future. Also reported on memories of having visited
Disneyland in the past. More participants remembered the false handshake as
a true memory than the true handshake group. Post-event false information
does influence memory.
Study 2 – 100 participants were given information verbally, pictorially or both.
The pictorial information group recalled more false information than the other
two groups.
Mark according to the levels of response descriptors in Table A.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(b) Evaluate what psychologists have discovered about intuitive thinking and its imperfections in
consumer decision-making (thinking fast and thinking slow, choice blindness, advertising and
false memory), including a discussion of practical applications. [10]

Ans: Evaluate what psychologists have discovered about intuitive thinking
and its imperfections in consumer decision-making (thinking fast and
thinking slow, choice blindness, advertising and false memory),
including a discussion of practical applications.
A range of issues could be used for evaluation here. These include:
• Named issue – Usefulness/practical applications
– e.g. Thinking fast/slow could be useful to advertisers as they could
identify which style is used for their product and make advertisements
that appeal to the thinking style that the consumer uses. In addition,
retailers could place items that use the thinking fast style near to the
checkout and those that use thinking slow in a quieter area of the store.
Retailers could ensure they have trained sales staff to assist customers
with products that use thinking slow style. Hall et al.’s study also has
good practical applications as it shows that consumers could be
influenced by packaging. ‘Value’ products could be placed in packaging
similar to branded products and this could attract more sales. Could
argue the false memory study does not have a practical application as it
is unlikely/illegal for advertisers to put false information into their
advertisements. However, sales assistants could convince customers on
a return visit that they had expressed a strong liking for a product when
they last visited the store.
• Strengths and weaknesses of the experimental method.
• Sampling and generalisations
• Ethics
• Use of questionnaires/self-reports (strengths and weaknesses)
Mark according to the levels of response descriptors in Table B.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

Psychology and health
Answer all questions.
5 (a) Explain what is meant by ‘psychogenic pain’. [2]

Ans: Explain what is meant by ‘psychogenic pain’.
Award 1 mark for a basic explanation of the term/concept.
Award 2 marks for a detailed explanation of the term/concept.
For example:
Pain perceived by the body of a limb no longer present.(1) It is psychogenic
as the pain is imagined by the mind. (1)
Other appropriate responses should also be credited.

 

(b) Describe cognitive redefinition as a technique for managing pain. [4]

Ans: Describe cognitive redefinition as a technique for managing pain.
Award 1–2 marks for a basic answer with some understanding of the topic
area.
Award 3–4 marks for a detailed answer with clear understanding of the topic
area.
For example:
Based on the theory that pain starts in the brain and therefore altering the
patient’s thoughts about pain will change their perception of the pain. (1) It
alters thinking to replace anxious thoughts about the pain with more positive
thoughts. (1). For example, the patient could think that ‘this will only hurt a
little bit’ rather than ‘this is the worst pain imaginable’. (1) Can also include
redefining the pain as a different sensation such as pressure, warmth or cold.
(1) 

 

(c) Explain one similarity and one difference between cognitive redefinition and biochemical
techniques for managing pain. [6]

Ans: Explain one similarity and one difference between cognitive redefinition
and biochemical techniques for managing pain.
Similarities could include:
• Both require professional (doctor to prescribe and psychologist to ‘teach’
cognitive redefinition)
• Both have research support for their success.
• Both have been shown to be effective in relieving pain. Cognitive
redefinition relieves pain as it alters how the patient thinks about the pain
and this leads to pain reduction. Medical techniques change the
physiology within the body which lead to a reduction in pain.
Differences could include:
• Individual needs to be motivated (and of certain personality type/insight)
for cognitive redefinition, whereas individual needs relatively little
motivation to take drug.
• Some drugs have side effects/addiction (e.g. nausea, vomiting, dizziness,
dry mouth – opiates) No side effects with cognitive redefinition.
• Patient more actively involved in cognitive redefinition but passive in drug
therapy.
• Cognitive redefinition takes time for the patient to learn the strategy and
implement it, whereas medical techniques are faster acting.
Mark according to the levels of response criteria below:
Level 3 (5–6 marks)
• Candidates will show a clear understanding of the question and will
include one similarity and one difference.
• Candidates will provide a good explanation with clear detail.
Level 2 (3–4 marks)
• Candidates will show an understanding of the question and will include
one appropriate similarity in detail or one appropriate difference in detail.
OR one similarity and one difference in less detail.
• Candidates will provide a good explanation.
Level 1 (1–2 marks)
• Candidates will show a basic understanding of the question and will
attempt a similarity and/or difference. This could include both but just as
an attempt.
• Candidates will provide a limited explanation.
Level 0 (0 marks)
No response worthy of credit.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited

 

6 (a) Describe what psychologists have discovered about measuring non-adherence to medical
advice. [8]

Ans: Describe what psychologists have discovered about measuring nonadherence to medical advice.
Measuring non-adherence, including the following:
• subjective: self-reports (Riekart and Droter, 1999)
• objective: pill counting (Chung and Naya, 2000)
• biochemical tests (Roth and Caron, 1978)
• repeat prescriptions (Sherman et al., 2000)
Subjective: self-reports (Riekart and Droter, 1999)
Asking the patient if they are following their treatment programme.
Study – Adolescents with diabetes for more than one year, aged 11–18 living
with at least one parent, 94 families included, questionnaire, interview and
medical data were used. Families divided into three groups – non-consenters
(14), non-returners (28) and participants/returners (52). Found significant
differences in adherence levels between participants and non-returners.
Those who returned the questionnaire had higher adherence scores and
tested blood sugar more frequently.
Objective: pill counting (Chung and Naya, 2000)
Counted by health professionals. There are also electronic measures such as
TrackCap.
Study – 57 Asthmatic patients (mix M and F) began initial screening of
3 weeks and 12 weeks of treatment during which they were told to take their
medication twice a day. Given 3 weeks’ worth of medication and instructed to
return to clinic to collect more. TrackCap monitoring system device was
issued with the tablets. On days when patients took exactly 2 tablets mean
time between doses 12½ hours. 89% compliance was found – number of
days two Trackcap uses at least 8 hours apart. On basis of tablet count
compliance was 92%. Conclusion Trackcap is a convenient and effective
medication monitoring system.
Biochemical tests (Roth and Caron, 1978)
Can be done via blood tests and urine samples.
Study – 116 patients used. Intake of antacid regime was monitored. Although
patients said their intake averaged 89%, found actual intake was 47%.
Physician accuracy did not improve as they became more familiar with the
patient. Pill counting was also found to be inaccurate. Therefore, it is very
important for practitioners to use objective, quantitative tests to measure
adherence to medical advice. Roth and Caron suggest urine and blood tests
that are taken over a number of months will give a more accurate indication of
adherence.
Repeat prescriptions (Sherman et al., 2000)
116 children with persistent asthma. Interviews with parent/carer on clinic
visit. Estimated adherence on a checklist. Followed up with a telephone call to
the pharmacies the parent/carer said that they used. Information provided by
the pharmacies was 92% accurate. Adherence was 72%, 61% and 38% for
the three different inhalers prescribed to the children. Checking refills is an
accurate way of measuring adherence. Also found doctors are not able to tell
if patient is using their inhaler from consultation alone.
Mark according to the levels of response descriptors in Table A.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited

 

(b) Evaluate what psychologists have discovered about measuring non-adherence to medical
advice, including a discussion about self-reports. [10]

Ans: Evaluate what psychologists have discovered about measuring nonadherence to medical advice, including a discussion about self-reports.
A range of issues could be used for evaluation here. These include:
• Named issue – Self-reports
Can evaluate both self-reports used in the research and/or the use of
self-reports to measure non-adherence. Strengths include strengths of
primary data, can find out what the patient/parent of patient thinks,
weaknesses include issues with bias/social desirability. Although for
many of the studies the purpose was to prove that self-reports do not
create an accurate picture of non-adherence.
Adherence and IDDM Questionnaire-R used in the Riekart and Droter
study. Semi-structured interview assessing the adolescents’ adherence to
treatment. Also a demographics questionnaire was given to the parents of
the participants.
Sherman et al. – researcher interviewed the patient to find out the name
of the pharmacy.
Roth and Caron – patient was asked how often he took his antacids. Also
asked how he measured his doses of medication.
• Qualitative and quantitative measures with an evaluation of these
measures
• Subjective vs objective tests
• Evidence to back up effectiveness of these tests (and evaluation of
evidence)
• Usefulness/practical applications
• Cannot measure all non-adherence
Mark according to the levels of response descriptors in Table B.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited.

 

Psychology and organisations
Answer all questions.
7 (a) McClelland proposed the theory of achievement motivation which included three types of
needs.
Identify two of these needs, other than the need for achievement. [2]

Ans: McClelland proposed the theory of achievement motivation which
included three types of needs.
Identify two of these needs, other than the need for achievement.
Award 1 mark for each need.
Need for affiliation (1)
Need for power (1)
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(b) Describe how equity theory (Adams, 1963) explains motivation at work. [4]

Ans: Describe how equity theory (Adams, 1963) explains motivation at work.
Award 1–2 marks for a basic answer with some understanding of the topic
area.
Award 3–4 marks for a detailed answer with clear understanding of the topic
area.
For example:
People consider what is fair in a relationship and assess their input into the
relationship compared to the output from the relationship. (1) In terms of
organisations an employer/employee judges the employees net worth to the
company and if they are equal to other employees. (1) If the employee
perceives they are putting in more than they are getting out in comparison to
others at the same organisation they will not feel motivated. (1) However, if
they feel they are putting in less than they are getting out in comparison to
others they will feel motivated. (1)
e.g. An employee works 50 hours a week compared to most employees
working 40 hours per week for the same pay.(1) This employee will not be
motivated.(1)
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(c) Explain one strength and one weakness of equity theory. [6]

Ans: Explain one strength and one weakness of equity theory.
Likely strengths include –
• Equity theory also involves the free will of the employee as they are
judging for themselves whether they feel their contribution is equivalent to
the other employees in the company.
• Adams does have applications as the employer can discuss with the
employees what their perceptions are of their input and output and hope
to make things fairer.
• Reductionist nature of the theory makes it easier for employers to
understand and therefore makes it more useful.
Likely weaknesses include –
• Not possible to make everything equal and also some employees may
not recognise the input of others at the company if it is less tangible (e.g.
the quality of the report rather than how long the report is).
• The theory is describing motivation of people in general and was not
specifically developed for organisations.
• Reductionist/mechanistic nature of the theory. The theory suggests that
employees are comparing the input and output and comparing it to others
at the company. This is a view that sees employees like machines and
assumes they make rational and conscious decisions in the workplace
about their input and output. Many employees may be unaware of how
they view their work compared to others at the same company.
Mark according to the levels of response criteria below:
Level 3 (5–6 marks)
• Candidates will show a clear understanding of the question and will
explain one strength and one weakness.
• Candidates will provide a good explanation with clear detail.
Level 2 (3–4 marks)
• Candidates will show an understanding of the question and will explain
one appropriate weakness in detail or one appropriate strength in detail.
OR one weakness and one strength in less detail.
Level 1 (1–2 marks)
• Candidates will show a basic understanding of the question and will
attempt an explanation of either a strength or a weakness. They could
include both but just as an attempt.
• Candidates will provide a limited explanation.
Level 0 (0 marks)
No response worthy of credit.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited. 

 

(a) Describe what psychologists have discovered about leaders and followers in organisations
(leader-member exchange model/individualised leadership model, followership, measuring
leadership). [8]

Ans: Describe what psychologists have discovered about leaders and
followers in organisations (leader-member exchange model/
individualised leadership model, followership, measuring
leadership).
Leaders and followers, including the following:
• Leader-member exchange model (Dansereau, 1994) and
individualised leadership model (Dansereau, 1995)
• Followership: qualities of and types (Kelley, 1988)
• Measuring leadership: Leadership Practices Inventory (Kouzes and
Posner, 1987)
Leader-member exchange model (Dansereau, 1994) and individualised
leadership model (Dansereau, 1995)
Vertical Dyad Linkage theory – relationships develop through three stages.
Role taking stages (where leaders and followers meet each other and leaders
need to make their expectations clear), Role making stage (the team begins
to work together), role routinisation (routines occur and high quality
exchanges exist between leader and sub-ordinate; organisational
environment can be improved at this stage).
Also model suggests that leaders treat followers differently with respect to
respect, trust and obligation. This leads to the creation of an in-group (those
followers who are trusted) and an out-group (the followers in an organisation
that the leader maintains a more formal relationship with).
Individualised model – extends the theory focusing on one-to-one relationship
between supervisor and subordinate and what each invests in the relationship
as well as what they get out of it (their return). This can be a good relationship
where the leader provides the employee a high level of support which
improves the performance of the employee. It is very important that the leader
develops the employee’s feeling of self-worth and if this does not happen,
although person may be the manager, the employee will not view them as
their ‘leader’. Successful leaders must vary the approach they take with each
individual member of staff depending on their needs. This is why it is called
‘individualised’.
Followership: qualities of and types (Kelley, 1988)
Qualities include:
Self management – The ability to think for oneself and be able to work without
close supervision.
Commitment – Committed to the organisation and its goals.
Competence – They are good at their job and focus on maximising their
output.
Courage – They are courageous, honest and have integrity. They maintain
high standards even in face of dishonest or corrupt managers. They are
independent and critical thinkers. 

 

(b) Evaluate what psychologists have discovered about leaders and followers in organisations
(leader-member exchange model/individualised leadership model, followership, measuring
leadership), including a discussion on reductionism versus holism. [10]

Ans: Types include –
Sheep are passive and uncritical, lacking in initiative and sense of
responsibility.
Yes people – Dependent on the leader for inspiration. They are committed to
the leader/organisation but are uncritical and conformist.
Alienated followers – Critical and independent in their thinking but passive in
carrying out their role.
Survivors (pragmatics) – Adapt at surviving change. They are conservative in
their views and will wait until the majority of the group support innovative
ideas before giving their support. They hold the view of ‘better safe than
sorry’.
Effective followers (star followers) – Independent and think for themselves.
Carry out their duties with energy and effectiveness.
Measuring leadership: Leadership Practices Inventory (Kouzes and
Posner, 1987)
Measures extent to which a leader engages in the five practices of exemplary
leadership. Six behavioural statements are given for each of these practices.
E.g. model the way, inspire the shared vision, challenge the process, enable
others to act, encourage the heart.
30 specific leadership behaviours are measured on a ten-point scale.
(1 – almost never, 10 – almost always). Observers also do these ratings and
this can be from manager, co-worker, etc. Total responses for each practice
can range from 6–60 and the worker receives a score for each practice that
they gave as well as the scores of the observers. Comparisons can be made
between the employee/observer responses and over 1 million observer
responses for other leaders who have taken the LPI.
Finally, there are open-ended questions at the end of the inventory for the
observer to answer. The leader is shown these in their final report. For
example, ‘What would you like to see this leader do more of?’
Mark according to the levels of response descriptors in Table A.
Other appropriate responses should also be credited.

Section A
You must answer two questions from this section.
Answer all the parts for the two questions you choose.
Psychology and abnormality
1 Griffiths (2005) refers to a case of a person addicted to gambling who says:
‘If I wasn’t actually gambling I was spending the rest of my time working out clever little schemes
to obtain money to feed my habit. These two activities literally took up all my time.’
This quote is typical of gambling and many other types of addictive behaviours, including
pyromania and kleptomania.
(a) Explain what is meant by ‘pyromania’. [2]

Ans: Explain what is meant by ‘pyromania’.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
• Where the person has deliberately and intentionally set fires on more
than one occasion.
• Experiences tension or affective arousal before the act.
• Has a fascination with, interest in, curiosity about, or attraction to fire
and its situational contexts (e.g., paraphernalia, uses, and
consequences).
• Pleasure, gratification, power or relief when setting fires or when
witnessing or participating in their aftermath.
• The fire-setting is not done for monetary gain, as an expression of
socio-political ideology, to conceal criminal activity, to express anger or
vengeance, to improve one’s living circumstances, in response to a
delusion or hallucination, or as a result of impaired judgment.
• The fire-setting is not explained by conduct disorder, a manic episode,
or antisocial personality disorder.
Marks: 1 mark for basic answer (likes setting fires), 2 marks for
detail/elaboration/example (as indicated above) 

 

(b) Give two components of any addiction outlined by Griffiths (2005). [4]

Ans: Give two components of any addiction outlined by Griffiths (2005).
Most likely answers:
• Salience when the particular activity becomes the most important
activity in the person’s life and dominates their thinking (preoccupations
and cognitive distortions), feelings (cravings) and behaviour
(deterioration of socialised behaviour)
• Mood modification/euphoria the subjective experience that people
report as a consequence of engaging in the particular activity (i.e. an
arousing ‘buzz’ or a ‘high’)
• Tolerance the process whereby increasing amounts of the particular
activity are required to achieve the former effects
• Withdrawal symptoms the unpleasant feeling states and/or physical
effects which occur when the particular activity is discontinued or
suddenly reduced
• Conflict conflicts between the addict and those around them
(interpersonal conflict) or from within the individual themselves
(intrapsychic conflict)
• Relapse the tendency for repeated reversions to earlier patterns of the
particular activity to recur
Note: answer does not have to be related to any example, although
examples receive credit.
Marks: 1 mark basic answer (identification component), 2 marks
detail/elaboration/example X2. 

 

(c) Suggest two ways to measure a person’s addiction to gambling, other than using a
questionnaire. [4]

Ans: Suggest two ways to measure a person’s addiction to gambling, other
than using a questionnaire.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
• Observation (covert or overt; structured; non-participant, natural – or
any combination of these
• Interview (face-to-face or by telephone)
• Case study (one person with range of methods, or for example the
case study of ‘Jo’ by Griffiths.
• Physiological measure (such as ECG, GSR, hormone levels)
Marks: 1 mark basic answer (identification of method plus a comment
about how that method would work. Max 1 mark for each suggestion if
not related to gambling), 2 marks related to gambling, X2
Some answers may suggest ‘anecdotal’ measures. Max 1 mark for such
answers
Note: 0 marks for questionnaires such as Gambling prevalence survey,
CPGI, etc
Note: rating scales must be based on a question, so 0 marks for ‘rating
scale’
Note: 0 marks for interviews/open ended questions that make no reference
to measurement. 

 

(d) Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of using questionnaires to measure kleptomania. You
should include a conclusion in your answer. [5]

Ans: Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of using questionnaires to
measure kleptomania. You should include a conclusion in your
answer.
Marks: 1 mark for each strength/weakness (however basic/detailed) which
is related/linked to the question (max 4 marks). 1 mark for conclusion.
Conclusion: any appropriate conclusion drawn from the discussion that has
been presented. 1 mark if appropriate. A conclusion is a ‘decision reached
by reasoning’ and so a summary of points already made scores 0 marks.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
Strengths:
• Asking people directly, using a questionnaire, especially open-ended,
means that participants are given the opportunity to express their
feelings about stealing and explain their stealing behaviour rather than
the researcher trying to work out reasons for this behaviour from other
methods
• Relatively large numbers of participants can be done relatively easily in
comparison to say a face-to-face interview or experiment.
Questionnaires are easy to replicate.
• Data can be qualitative, but may also be quantitative depending on type
of question
Weaknesses:
• Some participants may provide socially desirable responses; not give
truthful answers about their stealing behaviour; respond to demand
characteristics.
• Closed/fixed-choice questions may force people into choosing answers
that do not reflect their true opinion and therefore may lower the validity.
• Researchers have to be careful about use of leading questions; it could
affect the validity of the data collected. 

 

Psychology and consumer behaviour
2 Porublev et al. (2009) gathered qualitative data to investigate whether a gift should be wrapped or
not, because of the expectations surrounding the use of gift-wrapping.
Fig. 2.1 Examples of wrapped gifts
(a) Explain the two key expectations surrounding the use of gift-wrapping. [2]

Ans: Explain the two key expectations surrounding the use of gift-wrapping.
Definitive answer: (Quoting study)
There are two key expectations surrounding the use of gift wrapping.
• the first expectation is that receivers prefer gifts to be wrapped and
• that the gift meets individual and social expectations of what a gift
should look like.
Marks: 1 mark for ‘it is wrapped’ +1 mark for ‘it looks like a gift’
Note: 0 marks for ‘who it is for’; ‘where the gift is going’; ‘what the occasion
is’

 

(b) Porublev et al. only collected qualitative data.
Give two ways in which qualitative data was gathered in this study. [4]

Ans: Porublev et al. only collected qualitative data.
Give two ways in which qualitative data was gathered in this study.
Definitive answer Quoting study
Data was gathered using three qualitative techniques;
• observation (1 mark) of a Christmas gift-wrap stall (2 marks)
• interviews (1 mark) twenty in-depth interviews to reflect on giftwrapping (2 marks)
• projective workshops (1 mark) where, in pairs, participants were
asked to wrap two gifts, one for someone they are close to and the
other for an acquaintance, and have a discussion about gift wrapping
whilst doing so (2 marks)
Marks: 1 mark basic answer (identification), 2 marks detailed
answer/elaboration or use of example (as in brackets above) X2. 

 

(c) (i) Explain what is meant by the term ‘reliability’. [2]

Ans: Explain what is meant by the term ‘reliability’.
Definitive answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
1 mark basic answer e.g. reliability means consistency
+1 mark: any elaboration or example e.g. reliability is the extent to which a
procedure, task or measure produces the same results on different
occasions. Alternatively, same measure is tested at a later date on same
participant (i.e. test-retest); two or more independent observers are reliable
(consistent) in giving the same score to the same behaviour
Note: 0 marks for ‘being trustworthy’, repeating a study, or replication.

 

(ii) Suggest how the reliability of the qualitative data gathered in this study could be
assessed. [2]

Ans: Suggest how the reliability of the qualitative data gathered in this
study could be assessed.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
• inter-rater reliability, where two or more independent judges or raters
assess what is said in the interview, or what is observed, for example.
This could be done with predefined response categories and the extent
of agreement recorded.
Note: no marks for test-retest.
Marks: 1 mark basic answer, 2 marks example from ‘this study’ See Q2(b)
for examples of what the qualitative data might be.

 

(d) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using qualitative data to assess gift-wrapping
preference. You should include a conclusion in your answer. [5]

Ans: Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using qualitative data to
assess gift-wrapping preference. You should include a conclusion in
your answer.
Marks: 1 mark for each advantage/disadvantage (however basic/detailed)
which is related/linked to the question (max 4 marks). 1 mark for
conclusion.
Conclusion: any appropriate conclusion drawn from the discussion that has
been presented. 1 mark if appropriate. A conclusion is a ‘decision reached
by reasoning’ and so a summary of points already made scores 0 marks.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited, such as
eye movement patterns):
Advantages
• Asking people directly means that participants are given the opportunity
to express their feelings and explain their experiences rather than the
researcher trying to work out reasons for their behaviour from other
methods
• People can give as much information as they wish about their giftwrapping preferences, but they can also say little or nothing if they wish.
• Data can be qualitative, but may also be quantitative depending on type
of question
Disadvantages
• Some participants may provide socially desirable responses about their
gift-wrapping preferences; not give truthful answers; respond to demand
characteristics.
• Qualitative data tends not to lead to the calculation of statistics to allow
comparison.
• Researchers have to be careful about use of leading questions; it could
affect the validity of the data collected. 

 

Psyhcology and health

3 Newspaper headline: Doctors with a directing style give more satisfaction.
Savage and Armstrong (1990) studied patient satisfaction with different consultation styles. Patients
who received a directing style consultation reported significantly higher levels of satisfaction on
almost all measures, compared with those who received a sharing style consultation.
(a) Explain what method was used to assess patient satisfaction in the study by Savage and
Armstrong (1990). [2]

Ans: Explain what method was used to assess patient satisfaction in the
study by Savage and Armstrong (1990).
Most likely (quotes from study)
• Patients’ satisfaction was measured by a questionnaire completed by
the patients that asked about the quality of communication in the
consultation and thoughts after the consultation was over.
• The patient was asked to complete the questionnaire in the waiting
room and give it to the receptionist before leaving the surgery. A second
questionnaire with a stamped addressed envelope was then given to
each patient with instructions to fill it in and post it after one week.
Marks: 1 mark identification of questionnaire, 2 marks for
elaboration/example (after the consultation was over/after one week)
Note: 0 marks for interview or any other method. Do not credit ‘self-report’
as this is too vague. 

 

(b) Explain two reasons why the number of participants used in the analysis of results was lower
than the original number of participants. [4]

Ans: Explain two reasons why the number of participants used in the
analysis of results was lower than the original number of participants.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited): Quoting
from study
Overall, 359 patients were invited to take part in the study.
• 4 declined to participate (did not give consent or withdrew)
• 5 were excluded (reasons included schizophrenia and manic
depression)
• 30 patients failed to complete the initial assessment (in the waiting
room)
• 120 failed to complete the assessment a week later (the postal
questionnaire).
Marks: 1 mark for: basic statement, 2 marks for elaboration/example
Note: numbers not needed to score full marks; approximate numbers are
acceptable when quoted.
Note: withdrawal/consent are same point, so 1 mark if both identified. 

 

(c) (i) Participants were randomly selected to participate in the study.
Explain why this was important. [2]

Ans:

Participants were randomly selected to participate in the study.
Explain why this was important.
Most likely answer
Random selection ensures that all members of the target population have
an equal chance of participating (1 mark) because ‘a random number
generator was used to select, in advance, four patients for the study from
each surgery held by one general practitioner (RS) over four months’ (+1
mark).
There is no selection bias/everyone has an equal chance of participating
(1 mark) by the doctor/researcher, or any link to this study. (+1 mark)

Marks: 1 mark for importance, 1 mark for relating to study (however briefly).
Note: makes it more generalisable (0 marks) but with explanation (1 mark)

 

(ii) Participants were randomly allocated to a directing or a sharing style.
Explain why this was important. [2]

Ans: Participants were randomly allocated to a directing or a sharing style.
Explain why this was important.
Most likely answer
Random allocation ensures that all participants have an equal chance of
being allocated to either condition (1 mark) ‘A set of cards was produced to
allocate randomly either a directing or a shared style, and these were kept
face down on the doctor’s desk. The card was turned over only when the
patient had completed his or her description of the initial problem and had
been identified as suitable for entry to the study’ (2 marks)
There is no allocation bias (1 mark) by the doctor/researcher (+1 mark) or
so the patients don’t know what style they will receive (+1 mark)
Marks: 1 mark for importance, 1 mark for relating to study (however briefly).

 

(d) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using postal questionnaires to gather data
about health preferences. You should include a conclusion in your answer. [5]

Ans: Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using postal
questionnaires to gather data about health preferences. You should
include a conclusion in your answer.
Marks: 1 mark for each advantage/disadvantage (however basic/detailed)
which is related/linked to the question (max 4 marks). 1 mark for
conclusion.
Conclusion: any appropriate conclusion drawn from the discussion that has
been presented. 1 mark if appropriate. A conclusion is a ‘decision reached
by reasoning’ and so a summary of points already made scores 0 marks.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
Advantages
• Full information can be given so better than an interview
• People can read and complete at their own leisure (in their own home),
think about and then make decisions (without pressure from anyone)
• People may prefer to write personal answers about health preferences
rather than tell someone face-to-face
Disadvantages
• People may not receive the mailing, or receive it but never read it;
• people read the information about health preferences but not act on it
(or forget to act on it)
• people may delay acting (appraisal delay etc. re Safer)

 

Psychology and organisations
4 In the 1920s, scientific management studies were conducted at the Hawthorne Plant of the
Western Electric Company in the United States, which were known as the ‘Hawthorne studies’.
The aim was to investigate which physical variables could be manipulated to increase production.
The findings were not as expected, leading to a conclusion called the ‘Hawthorne effect’.
(a) Explain what is meant by the ‘Hawthorne effect’. [2]

Ans: Explain what is meant by the ‘Hawthorne effect’.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
Quote from study
‘behavioral change due to an awareness of being observed, active
compliance with the supposed wishes of researchers because of special
attention received, or positive response to the stimulus being introduced.’
Alternatively ‘a marked increase in production related only to special social
position and social treatment’.
Alternatively it occurs when people behave differently (1 mark) because they
know they are being watched (+1 mark)
Marks: 1 mark basic answer 2 marks detailed answer/elaboration/
example.
Note: 0 marks for demand characteristics. 

 

(b) (i) Describe the main independent variable (IV). [2]

Ans: Describe the main independent variable (IV).
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
Quote from study
‘In the initial phase of the studies, the effect of illumination on productivity
was examined.
• The illumination was decreased step by step for the experimental
subjects, whilst the controls received constant illumination.’
Marks: 1 mark for identifying ‘illumination’, 2 marks for elaboration of
experimental group (illumination decreased step by step) or’ illumination
change versus constant illumination’, 0 marks for ‘physical variables’ (words
are in the question). 

 

(ii) Describe the dependent variable (DV). [2]

Ans: Describe the dependent variable (DV).
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
Quote from study:
‘Both sets of subjects slowly but steadily increased their performance of
inspecting parts, assembling relays or winding coils’
Marks: 1 mark basic answer (performance/productivity), 2 marks detailed
answer/elaboration/example (of inspecting parts, assembling relays or
winding coils) 

 

(c) Suggest two alternative interpretations of the results of the study, other than the Hawthorne
effect. [4]

Ans: Suggest two alternative interpretations of the results of the study,
other than the Hawthorne effect.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
Quote from study
‘Over the years several other interpretations of the results of the Hawthorne
studies than those made by the original reporters have been presented.
Accordingly, the observed increase in productivity may well have been
brought about by one or more of the following list:
• relief from harsh supervision,
• receiving positive attention (special privileges; the test room observer
was, however, mainly concerned with creating a friendly relationship
that would insure the workers’ cooperation),
• learning new ways of interaction (the improved personal relations
between workers and management),
• possibilities to influence work procedures,
• rest pauses (to allow for good control of the variables under study)
• higher income (of an incentive pay system based upon the output of the
group in the test room)
• threat of losing one’s job (the 1920s economic depression)
• changes in lighting levels’
Marks: 1 mark identification of interpretation, 2 marks elaboration/example
(see above). X2 

 

(d) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of controlling variables when conducting field
experiments on physical working conditions. You should include a conclusion in your answer.
[5]

Ans: Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of controlling variables
when conducting field experiments on physical working conditions.
You should include a conclusion in your answer.
Marks: 1 mark for each advantage/disadvantage (however basic/detailed)
which is related/linked to the question (max 4 marks). 1 mark for
conclusion.
Conclusion: any appropriate conclusion drawn from the discussion that has
been presented. 1 mark if appropriate. A conclusion is a ‘decision reached
by reasoning’ and so a summary of points already made scores 0 marks.
Most likely answer (other appropriate responses to be credited):
Self-reports can include questionnaires and interviews.
Advantages
• More control over irrelevant/extraneous variables means that the DV is
more likely to be due to the IV.
• The use of experimental and control group means the control group is
the baseline/benchmark of what is normal.
Disadvantages
• There may be uncontrolled variables which might confound the result of
a field experiment on physical working conditions
• Too many controls may make a situation artificial.
• Controlling variables is reductionist because no behaviour might exist in
isolation.

 

Section B
You must answer one question from this section.
Psychology and abnormality
5 (a) Design a longitudinal study to investigate whether cognitive-behavioural therapy (CBT)
manages schizophrenia effectively. [10]

Ans: Design a longitudinal study to investigate whether cognitivebehavioural therapy (CBT) manages schizophrenia effectively.
Marks: use generic levels of response Design a study question part (a).
Additional: Candidates should design the study showing evidence of
design features appropriate to the named method. The named method:
longitudinal study.
Any method can be used, provided that the data gathered is over a period of
time.
Typical features:
• Experiments: type, IV, DV, controls, experimental design.
• Observations: type, setting, response categories, sampling frame,
number of observers.
• Questionnaires/Interviews: type, setting, example questions.
Scoring/rating scale, analysis of responses.
General features of research methodology: sampling technique &
sample, type of data, ethics, reliability, validity, data analysis. 

 

(b) Explain the psychological and methodological evidence on which your study is based. [8]

Ans:

Explain the psychological and methodological evidence on which your
study is based.

Candidates are expected to explain the reasons for the suggested design in
part (a). Explanation should be both psychological and methodological.
Psychological to include appropriate theory or research.
Marks: use generic levels of response ‘Design a study’ question part (b).
‘Psychological’ = 4 marks; ‘methodological’ = 4 marks
If only methodological or psychological explanation is provided max 5
marks
If ‘psychological’ described and not related to part (a) max 2 marks.
Syllabus: cognitive-behavioural therapy (Sensky et al., 2000)
Psychological:
Sensky et al. (2000) used cognitive-behavioural therapy (CBT) to treat
schizophrenia in patients already taking medication. After CBT sessions
patients showed improvement. At the 9-month follow-up evaluation they
continued to improve. It was concluded that CBT is effective.
Note 0 marks for candidates who merely replicate this study.
Methodological: explanation of method using general and specific features
as above

 

Psychology and consumer behaviour
6 People often experience discomfort when their personal space is invaded.
(a) Design a study using a questionnaire to investigate which theory of personal space best
explains people’s discomfort in a crowded shop. [10]

Ans: People often experience discomfort when their personal space is
invaded.
Design a study using a questionnaire to investigate which theory of
personal space best explains people’s discomfort in a crowded shop.
Marks: use generic levels of response Design a study question part (a).
Additional: Candidates should design the study showing evidence of
design features appropriate to the named method. The named method:
questionnaire.
Specific features: Questionnaires/Interviews: type, setting, example
questions. Scoring/rating scale, analysis of responses.
General features of research methodology: sampling technique &
sample, type of data, ethics, reliability, validity, data analysis. 

 

(b) Explain the psychological and methodological evidence on which your study is based. [8]

Ans: Explain the psychological and methodological evidence on which your
study is based.
Candidates are expected to explain the reasons for the suggested design in
part (a). Explanation should be both psychological and methodological.
Psychological to include appropriate theory or research.
Marks: use generic levels of response ‘Design a study’ question part (b).
‘Psychological’ = 4 marks; ‘methodological’ = 4 marks
If only methodological or psychological explanation is provided max 5
marks
If ‘psychological’ described and not related to part (a) max 2 marks.
Syllabus: theories of personal space: overload, arousal and behaviour
constraint
Psychological:
Overload: are others in a shop coming too close and overstimulating us with
sensory experience
Arousal: when others invade our space we are aroused. We may be happy
with this, or we may move away/take flight/escape.
Behaviour constraint: if others are too close we may feel crowded because
we cannot move about the store freely.
Methodological: explanation of method using general and specific features
as above. 

 

Psychology and health
7 Prochaska et al. (1997) proposed the stages of change (transtheoretical) model.
(a) Design a longitudinal study to investigate whether a person wishing to change their health
behaviour follows the stages in this model. [10]

Ans: Prochaska et al. (1997) proposed the stages of change
(transtheoretical) model.
Design a longitudinal study to investigate whether a person wishing to
change their health behaviour follows the stages in this model.
Marks: use generic levels of response Design a study question part (a).
Additional: Candidates should design the study showing evidence of
design features appropriate to the named method. The named method is:
longitudinal study.
Any method can be used, provided that the data gathered is over a period of
time.
Typical features:
• Experiments: type, IV, DV, controls, experimental design.
• Observations: type, setting, response categories, sampling frame,
number of observers.
• Questionnaires/Interviews: type, setting, example questions.
Scoring/rating scale, analysis of responses.
General features of research methodology: sampling technique &
sample, type of data, ethics, reliability, validity, data analysis. 

 

(b) Explain the psychological and methodological evidence on which your study is based. [8]

Ans: Explain the psychological and methodological evidence on which your
study is based.
Candidates are expected to explain the reasons for the suggested design in
part (a). Explanation should be both psychological and methodological.
Psychological to include appropriate theory or research.
Marks: use generic levels of response ‘Design a study’ question part (b).
‘Psychological’ = 4 marks; ‘methodological’ = 4 marks
If only methodological or psychological explanation is provided max 5
marks
If ‘psychological’ described and not related to part (a) max 2 marks.
Syllabus: non-verbal communications (McKinstry and Wang, 1991)
Psychological:
McKinstry and Wang looked at different styles of a doctors’ appearance/
clothing. Participants looked at different male and female styles and found
that wearing a white coat was generally preferred.
Methodological: explanation of method using general and specific features
as above.

 

Psychology and organisations
8 Accidents at work may be caused by human errors or errors in operator-machine systems.
(a) Design a study to investigate which errors result in the most risk of accidents for workers.
[10]

Ans: Accidents at work may be caused by human errors or errors in
operator-machine systems.
Design a study to investigate which errors result in the most risk of
accidents for workers.
Marks: use generic levels of response Design a study question part (a).
Additional: Candidates should design the study showing evidence of
design features appropriate to the named method. The named method is:
any appropriate method.
Specific features:
• Experiments: type, IV, DV, controls, experimental design.
• Observations: type, setting, response categories, sampling frame,
number of observers.
• Questionnaires/Interviews: type, setting, example questions.
Scoring/rating scale, analysis of responses.
General features of research methodology: sampling technique &
sample, type of data, ethics, reliability, validity, data analysis. 

 

(b) Explain the psychological and methodological evidence on which your study is based. [8]

Ans: Explain the psychological and methodological evidence on which your
study is based.
Candidates are expected to explain the reasons for the suggested design in
part (a). Explanation should be both psychological and methodological.
Psychological to include appropriate theory or research.
Marks: use generic levels of response ‘Design a study’ question part (b).
‘Psychological’ = 4 marks; ‘methodological’ = 4 marks
If only methodological or psychological explanation is provided max 5
marks
If ‘psychological’ described and not related to part (a) max 2 marks.
Syllabus: accidents at work: errors and accidents in operator-machine
systems
Psychological:
Riggio (1990) suggests when operating machines there can be errors of:
• Omission: failing to do something, such as forgetting to turn something
off.
• Commission: performing an act incorrectly, i.e. doing something wrong.
• Sequence errors: doing something out of order.
• Timing errors: doing something too quickly, or too slowly
Errors can be due to tiredness/fatigue, use of alcohol and/or drugs or
because of accident proneness. More errors happen during the 8pm-6am
‘graveyard’ shift.
Methodological: explanation of method using general and specific features
as above. 

 

Section C
You must answer one question from this section.
Psychology and abnormality
9 ‘Psychometric measures, such as the Kleptomania Symptom Assessment Scale (K-SAS), provide
therapists with no useful information.’
To what extent do you agree with this statement? Use examples of research you have studied to
support your answer. [12]

Ans: Psychometric measures, such as the Kleptomania Symptom
Assessment Scale (K-SAS), provide therapists with no useful
information.’
To what extent do you agree with this statement? Use examples of
research you have studied to support your answer.
Marks: use generic levels of response in table C.
Syllabus: measures: Kleptomania Symptom Assessment Scale (K-SAS)
Most likely (any other appropriate responses should be credited):
Useful:
• Measures such as K-SAS indicate the severity of a disorder
• The measure can highlight specific features of the disorder
• The measure can be used as a comparison to others with the same
disorder
• The measure provides quantitative data
• Any feature of a psychometric test (e.g. reliable, standardised)
Not useful:
• Measures can use scales (5 or 7 point) which allow the person to ‘opt
out’ or give a neutral answer’
• Scales do not take individual differences into account; there might be
some aspect which the scales do not cover
• A patient may want to talk to a therapist about the problem, not just fill
in a questionnaire.
• Interviews by therapists may reveal far more about the individual
problem
• Interviews can reveal specific problems not covered by a general
psychometric test. 

 

Psychology and consumer behaviour
10 ‘Studies like ‘defending a place in a queue’ (Milgram et al., 1986) should never be conducted
because they are unethical.’
To what extent do you agree with this statement? Use examples of research you have studied to
support your answer. [12]

Ans: ‘Studies like ‘defending a place in a queue’ (Milgram et al., 1986)
should never be conducted because they are unethical.’
To what extent do you agree with this statement? Use examples of
research you have studied to support your answer.
Marks: use generic levels of response in table C.
Syllabus: defending place in a queue (Milgram et al., 1986)
Most likely (any other appropriate responses should be credited):
Should be done:
• The ends justify the means: studies should be done even if ethical
guidelines are broken
• The ethical issues are minimal. No-one is hurt
• If people are fully de-briefed then there is no problem conducting
studies
Should not be done
• ‘innocent’ people should not be participants in this study without their
informed consent.
• People should not be subjected to the psychological ‘harm’ of the stress
of another person pushing in.
• A debrief does not justify unethical procedures. 

 

Psychology and health
11 ‘Promoting healthy eating to children in schools is irrelevant; it is more important to promote
healthy eating to parents in the home.’
To what extent do you agree with this statement? Use examples of research you have studied to
support your answer. [12]

Ans: ‘Promoting healthy eating to children in schools is irrelevant; it is
more important to promote healthy eating to parents in the home.’
To what extent do you agree with this statement? Use examples of
research you have studied to support your answer.
Marks: use generic levels of response in table C.
Syllabus: health promotion in schools, worksites & communities
Most likely (any other appropriate responses should be credited):
Schools not irrelevant:
• Some studies such as Tapper et al. have shown healthy eating
programmes to be effective in schools.
• What children learn in school can be transferred to what children do in
the home; in life. Application of operant conditioning: positive
reinforcement can generalise
Schools irrelevant:
• Parents should be targeted to provide healthy food for their children; it
is a ‘back-route’ to change the family through children in schools.
• Parents influence children (Lau et al. ,1990) and the enduring family
socialisation model.
• Children are easily manipulated and can be influenced. Perhaps
unethical without parental consent. 

 

Psychology and organisations
12 ‘Group conflict can always be managed successfully.’
To what extent do you agree with this statement? Use examples of research you have studied to
support your answer. [12]

Ans: ‘Group conflict can always be managed successfully’.
To what extent do you agree with this statement? Use examples of
research you have studied to support your answer.
Marks: use generic levels of response in table C.
Syllabus: managing group conflict (Thomas, 1976)
Most likely (any other appropriate responses should be credited):
It can:
• Conflict can be successfully managed so it becomes a positive rather
than a negative
• Forsyth lists ways to manage conflict, such as through compromise of
both sides
• Conflict can be managed through radical solutions: moving a person to
a different department, sacking/firing, for the benefit of the organisation
and ‘efficiency’
It cannot:
• People may say that the conflict is resolved, but still maintain their own
view/grudge against a person.
• People may work with others, be professional, yet still maintain their
private dislike or distrust.
• Some people never believe that they are wrong; some have strong
principles; some would rather leave an organisation.